Maybach - 62 - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2007

MAYBACH Order No. 6515 4446 13 Part No. 240 584 38 82 USA Edition B 2007 OPERATOR’S MANUAL OPERATOR’S MANUAL Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren! Service and Literature Your authorized Maybach Studio has trained technicians and Genuine Maybach Parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Maybach Studio. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Maybach Studio. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Maybach web-site www.maybach-manufaktur.com or www.maybach.ca. G Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Maybach Studio. We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator's Manual might differ from your vehicle. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Press time November 13, 2006 GSP/TID Printed in Germany Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 S Our company congratulates you on the purchase of your new Maybach. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in Maybach Manufaktur. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Maybach represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time: 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference. 앫 Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Maybach. 앫 Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants. 앫 Should you have any questions, please contact your Maybach Studio MRM (Maybach Relationship Manager) or call us at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Service and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles . . . . . . . . . 11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Change of address or ownership . 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Proper use of the vehicle . . . . . . . 15 Problems with your vehicle . . . . . . . . 16 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 17 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 17 Vehicle data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Information regarding electronic recording devices. . . . . 18 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . Front center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Driver’s door control panel . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 without partition* . . Maybach 62 with partition* . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 (vehicles with rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 20 22 24 25 25 26 28 29 30 30 32 34 36 38 38 40 42 44 Rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles with rear center seat*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* (vehicles with rear center seat*). . Rear door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 46 47 48 49 51 52 54 54 55 Contents Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking with the SmartKey . . . Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** . . Starter switch positions. . . . . . . . . Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching on headlamps. . . . . . . . Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . Problems while driving . . . . . . . . . Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching off headlamps . . . . . . . Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . Releasing seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 58 58 59 60 62 62 64 66 68 68 70 72 73 73 74 74 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Occupant Classification System . . . 88 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 95 Override switch for rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . 100 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Electro-hydraulic brake system . . 107 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 110 Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . Checking batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . Opening the doors from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk emergency release . . . . . . Valet trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic central locking . . . . . . Locking and unlocking from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting front passenger seat position from rear . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 114 114 117 121 121 122 123 123 124 127 127 128 129 129 131 131 135 136 Contents Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat ventilation*. . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing positions in memory . . . Recalling positions from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position . . . . . . . Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . Corner-illuminating lamps . . . . . Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . Interior lighting in the front . . . Interior lighting in the rear . . . . Courtesy lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . Door entry lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting instrument cluster illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant temperature gauge . . . Resetting trip odometer. . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature indicator . Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . 138 139 140 141 141 141 142 142 145 146 147 148 149 153 153 153 154 154 155 155 155 155 156 156 157 157 158 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard display menu . . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic** menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle status message memory menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear selector lever positions . . . . Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic shift program . . . . . . . One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power folding exterior rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 162 162 164 166 167 167 169 170 178 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 186 186 188 189 190 191 192 Deactivating the climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the climate control system in automatic mode . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . Adjusting air distribution . . . . . . Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . . Front defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum cooling MAXCOOL . . . Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . Charcoal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual heat and ventilation. . . Temperature-controlled glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control panel. . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment. . . Activating the climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the climate control system in automatic mode . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . Adjusting air distribution . . . . . . Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual heat and ventilation. . . Solar panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 194 195 195 195 195 196 196 198 200 200 201 201 202 206 206 207 207 207 208 208 208 Contents Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summer opening feature . . . . . . Convenience closing feature . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof. . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . . Operating the electrotransparent roof . . . . . . . Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airmatic DC (Dual Control). . . . . Parktronic system (Parking assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Assist System (PAS) . . . . Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo tie-down hooks . . . . . . . . Loading instructions . . . . . . . . . . 209 209 210 211 211 212 212 213 214 217 218 218 221 221 223 233 237 240 247 247 247 Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Storage compartments. . . . . . . . . 248 Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Ashtrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Cigarette lighters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Non-smokers package* . . . . . . . . 263 Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) . . . . . . . 263 Refrigerator** in rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Battery charge socket. . . . . . . . . . 267 Rear window curtain . . . . . . . . . . 267 Rear door window curtains* . . . . 269 Partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 External communication (special order equipment) . . . . . . 276 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 276 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Garage door opener. . . . . . . . . . . 289 Infrared reflecting windshield . . . 293 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The first 1000 miles (1500 km) . . . . . Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive sensibly – save fuel . . . . . . . Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving instructions . . . . . Standing water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger compartment . . . . . . . Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and operation of radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . At the gas station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check regularly and before a long trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 296 297 297 297 297 297 298 299 299 300 300 300 301 301 302 302 303 303 303 304 304 305 305 306 Contents Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important guidelines . . . . . . . . . Tire care and maintenance. . . . . Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Recommended tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure. Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load identification . . . . . . . . . . . DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum tire load . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles). . . . . . . Tire ply material . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire and loading terminology . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 307 309 310 310 311 313 313 313 315 315 319 321 326 329 329 330 331 331 333 333 336 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating for winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance service indicator message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling up the maintenance service indicator display. . . . . . . . Resetting the maintenance service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and care of vehicle . . . . 337 337 338 338 339 339 340 341 342 342 Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to do if … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps in instrument cluster . . . . Lamp in center console . . . . . . . . Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . Where will I find ...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel. . . . . Unlocking/locking in an emergency. Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/closing in an emergency . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing SmartKey batteries . . . . . SmartKey/SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing bulbs for front lamps . License plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . Removing wiper blades. . . . . . . . Installing wiper blades . . . . . . . . 353 354 354 362 364 400 400 400 401 401 402 403 403 404 405 405 406 407 408 410 411 411 412 Contents Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the batteries . . . . Removing the batteries . . . . . . . Charging and reinstalling the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconnecting the batteries . . . . Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing towing eye bolt. . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aids for replacing fuses . . . . . . . Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse boxes in engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse box in passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse box in the trunk . . . . . . . . . 413 413 413 417 419 419 420 420 421 423 424 426 426 426 427 427 428 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Warranty coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet. . . . . . . . . . . 431 Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Layout of poly-V-belt drive . . . . . . . . 434 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Same size tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Main dimensions and weights. . . . . . 439 Main dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. . . . . . 440 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Engine oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . 441 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . 442 Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system. . . . . . 446 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Introduction Product information Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using Genuine Maybach Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved for use on Maybach vehicles and your model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Maybach vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Genuine Maybach Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are available at your authorized Maybach Studio where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. 10 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Maybach, including: 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, and Vermont only) 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. Introduction Operator’s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. Written notification should not be sent to a Maybach Studio, it should be addressed to Maybach Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Three Paragon Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual Roadside Assistance The Maybach Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) will be answered by Maybach Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Maybach Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or ownership If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: 앫 Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. 앫 If you sell your Maybach, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts. 앫 If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Certain Maybach models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Maybach Studio or write to: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 12 Introduction Where to find it Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color. At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior. Controls in detail Technical data Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. All important technical data for your Maybach can be found in this section. Operation Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first Maybach vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle. Safety and Security Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your Maybach. Practical hints Indexes The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily. The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: 앫 this Operator’s Manual 앫 the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle. This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter. Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your Maybach. 13 Introduction Symbols Symbols Trademarks: 앫 Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. 앫 ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler. 앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. 앫 SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual: * Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your Maybach. ** Two asterisks designate standard equipment which the purchaser of the vehicle had the option to delete at the time the vehicle was ordered. 14 Warning! G Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. ! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle. i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful. 왘 This symbol points to instructions for you to follow. 왘 A number of these symbols appear- ing in succession indicates a multiplestep procedure. 컄 page 컄컄 This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic. This continuation symbol marks a warning which is continued on the next page. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks a procedure which is continued on the next page. DISPLAY Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here. Introduction Operating safety Operating safety Warning! Warning! G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. G Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules: 앫 the safety precautions in this manual 앫 the “Technical data” section in this manual 앫 traffic rules and regulations 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning! G Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. 15 Introduction Problems with your vehicle Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your Maybach Relationship Manager at an authorized Maybach Studio to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Maybach Studio management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Maybach Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Three Paragon Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 16 Introduction Reporting safety defects Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your Maybach Studio, the Maybach Assistance Center, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 17 Introduction Vehicle data recording Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others 앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes 앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee 앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency 앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or 앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system. 18 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Front center console Overhead control panel Driver’s door control panel Rear passenger compartment Rear seats Rear center console Rear door control panel 19 At a glance Cockpit Cockpit 20 At a glance Cockpit Item Page 1 Exterior lamp switch 73, 142 2 Headlamp washer button 186 앫 High beam 74 앫 Turn signals 74 앫 Windshield wipers 74 4 Cruise control lever 앫 Cruise control 221 앫 Distronic** 223 5 Multifunction steering wheel 64, 158 6 Horn Page 8 Lever for Voice Control System, see separate operating instructions 9 Starter switch 3 Combination switch 7 Instrument cluster Item a Front Parktronic warning indicator 60 239 b Overhead control panel 28 c Compartment for front telephone 250, 278 The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the compartment for front telephone. 285 Item Page d Glove box lid release 249 e Glove box lock 249 f Front center console 25 g Steering wheel adjustment stalk 65 h Heated steering wheel switch 276 j Remote trunk opening/closing switch 124 k Parking brake pedal l Hood lock release 77 307 m Parking brake release 77 n Door control panel 29 22, 154 21 At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster 22 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item 1 Coolant temperature gauge 155 a A 2 Fuel gauge with fuel reserve warning lamp 355 3 L Left turn signal indicator lamp 4 Speedometer 5 v 1 ABS/ESP® warning lamp 6 l Distance warning lamp1 7 K Right turn signal indicator lamp Item High beam headlamp indicator lamp 145 k H b J Reset button 154 154 c < Seat belt telltale 92, 357 l Knob for instrument cluster illumination m ? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only 361 ± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only 361 n ; Brake warning lamp, USA only 360 3 Brake warning lamp, Canada only 360 o 1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp 82, 359 74 156 103, 105, 354 223, 356 74 8 Tachometer 155 9 - 103, 356 Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp Page d Digital clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) e Gear selector lever position and program mode 180 f Main odometer 157 g Trip odometer 155 h Multifunction display 157 j Outside temperature indicator 155 Page Tire inflation pressure warning lamp 359 Vehicles without Distronic**: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running. 23 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Multifunction steering wheel Item Page 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button 158 Page 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: æ up/to increase Press button ç down/to decrease j for next display k for previous display 3 Telephone: Press button 24 157 Item s to take a call to dial a call to redial t to end a call to reject an incoming call At a glance Front center console Front center console Upper part Item Page Item 1 Hazard warning flasher on/ off switch 147 7 Automatic climate control 2 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp 110 8 Chrome label for opening cover of: 3 Central locking switch 129 4 Central unlocking switch 129 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 91 6 COMAND (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Page 191 앫 Cup holders 258 앫 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 267 앫 Button for opening/closing rear door window curtains* 269 25 At a glance Front center console Lower part Maybach 57 and Maybach 62 without partition* i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 26 Item Page 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 61, 71 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 70 3 Parking Assist System (PAS) parallel parking button 244 4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 134 5 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 240 6 Two-way intercom* on/off button (only Maybach 62) 274 Item Page 7 Chrome label for opening cover of: 앫 Ashtray 260 앫 Lighter 262 앫 Storage compartment* 263 8 Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 230 9 Distance warning function** on/off button 230 a Level control button 236 b Airmatic DC button 233 c Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) control switch 106 d Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 184 At a glance Front center console Maybach 62 with partition* Item Page Item 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 61, 71 8 Partition* opening/closing button 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 70 9 Chrome label for opening cover of: 3 Parking Assist System (PAS) parallel parking button 244 4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 134 5 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 240 6 Two-way intercom on/off button 274 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 273 Page 271 앫 Ashtray 260 앫 Lighter 262 앫 Storage compartment* 263 a Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 230 b Distance warning function** on/off button 230 c Level control button 236 d Airmatic DC button 233 e Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) control switch 106 f Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 184 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 27 At a glance Overhead control panel Overhead control panel d 28 Item Page 1 Left front reading lamp on/off 148 2 Rear interior lighting on/off 148 3 Interior lighting control 148 4 Right front reading lamp on/off 148 5 Front interior lighting on/off 148 6 Tow-away alarm button 112 7 Rear view mirror 66, 186 8 Garage door opener 289 9 Auto-dimming function on/ off 186 Item Page a Hands-free microphone for: 앫 Telephone 277 앫 Tele Aid (emergency call system) 281 앫 Voice Control System, see separate operating instructions b Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 c Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 212 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 214 Switch for operating electrotransparent roof* screen 218 At a glance Driver’s door control panel Driver’s door control panel Item Page 1 Inside door handle 122 2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings) 141 3 Seat adjustment 62 4 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out 188 5 Exterior mirror adjustment 66 6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows 209 Item Page 7 Override switch for rear passenger compartment 100 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows 209 9 Button for opening storage compartment 250 a Handle for opening storage compartment 250 b Seat ventilation* 139 c Seat heating 138 29 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) 30 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item 1 Vanity mirror, left 248 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 Page 248 7 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right 253 8 Automatic climate control panel 253 Item Page 9 Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 252 a Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left 253 b Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 31 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) 32 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item 1 Vanity mirror, left 248 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 Page 248 7 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right 253 8 Automatic climate control panel 206 Item 9 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in rear center console a Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left Page 47 253 b Video monitor, left (separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 33 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 without partition* 34 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 248 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 5 Vanity mirror, right 248 Item Page 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Item Page a Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 252 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in the storage compartment/drawer 49, 52 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment 253 8 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right 253 b Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left 9 Automatic climate control panel 206 c Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 253 35 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 with partition* 36 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 248 2 Speedometer 156 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 156 4 Outside temperature gauge 155 5 Vanity mirror, right 248 Item Page 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Item Page a Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 252 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in the storage compartment/drawer 49, 52 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment 253 8 Storage pocket, right 254 b Storage pocket, left 9 Automatic climate control panel 206 c Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 254 37 At a glance Rear seats Rear seats Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) 38 At a glance Rear seats Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 238 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 255 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 255 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 255 Item 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 6 Door control panel, left Page 255 54 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 251 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 251 9 Center armrest with Item a Rear center console Page 46 b Rear-cabin cup holder 258 c 12-V socket 266 d Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 137 e Folding table* 263 f Folding table* 263 g Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 137 앫 Storage compartment for telephone 280 h Handle for opening right door storage compartment 251 앫 Storage compartment underneath 255 251 앫 Refrigerator** underneath 265 j Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones k Door control panel, right 54 39 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) 40 At a glance Rear seats Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page 238 2 Rear center backrest 앫 앫 앫 DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 256 Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 256 Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 280 Item 앫 Page Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage compartment (backrest folded down) for 앫 telephone and 앫 control panel for rear functions 3 Door control panel, left 280 47 54 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 251 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray 251 6 Cup holder 259 Item Page 7 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 137 8 12-V socket 266 9 Switch for rear center seat head restraints 135 a Cup holder 259 b Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 137 c Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 251 d Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 251 e Door control panel, right 54 41 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 62 (vehicles without rear center seat*) 42 At a glance Rear seats Item Page Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 238 6 Door control panel, left 255 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 251 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 251 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 255 9 Button for opening storage compartment 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 255 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 255 55 Item d Rear center console Page 46 e Rear-cabin cup holder 258 f 12-V socket 266 g Folding table 264 h Folding table 264 251 j Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 137 a Storage compartment 251 251 b Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 137 k Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones c Center armrest with 280 l Handle for opening right door storage compartment 251 m Button for opening storage compartment 251 n Storage compartment 251 앫 Storage compartment for telephone 앫 Storage compartment underneath 255 앫 Refrigerator** underneath 265 o Door control panel, right 55 43 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 62 (vehicles with rear center seat*) 44 At a glance Rear seats Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page 238 2 Rear center backrest 앫 앫 앫 DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 256 Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 256 Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 280 Item 앫 Page Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage compartment (backrest folded down) for Item Page 8 Storage compartment 251 9 Cup holder 259 a 12-V socket 266 앫 280 b Switch for rear center seat head restraints 135 telephone and 앫 control panel for rear functions 49, 52 c Cup holder 259 3 Door control panel, left 55 d Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 137 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 251 e Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 251 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray 251 f Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 251 6 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 137 g Button for opening storage compartment 251 7 Button for opening storage compartment 251 h Storage compartment 251 j Door control panel, right 55 45 At a glance Rear center console Rear center console Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 149 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 3 Right reading lamp on/off 149 4 Ambient lighting on/off 149 Rear interior lamps on/off 149 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 149 6 Cover of compartment with: Example with rear door window curtains* i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 46 앫 Ashtray 260 앫 Lighter 262 앫 Storage compartment* 263 Item Page 7 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 8 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if equipped with rear door window curtains*) 267 9 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 a Rear interior lamps on/off 149 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if not equipped with rear door window curtains*) 267 b Central unlocking switch 129 c Central locking switch 129 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) Control panel for rear functions* in rear center console i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 149 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 3 Right reading lamp on/off 149 4 Ambient lighting on/off 149 Rear interior lamps on/off 149 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 149 6 Rear interior lamps on/off 149 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if not equipped with rear door window curtains*) Control panel for rear window curtains* in rear armrest compartment 267 Item 7 Central locking switch 129 8 Central unlocking switch 129 Page 1 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 2 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if equipped with rear door window curtains*) 267 3 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 47 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles without rear center seat*) Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 151 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 3 Right reading lamp on/off 151 4 Ambient lighting on/off 151 5 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off 151 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 151 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 274 8 Cover of compartment with: i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 48 앫 Ashtray 260 앫 Lighter 262 앫 Storage compartment* 263 9 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 216 Item Page a Switch for raising/lowering power tilt/sliding sunroof 216 b Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 c Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 267 d Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 e Button for opening/closing partition* 271 f Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 271 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 274 h Rear interior lamps on/off 151 j Central unlocking switch 129 k Central locking switch 129 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles with rear center seat*) Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer Item Page Item Page 1 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 7 Two-way intercom* on/off button 274 2 Right reading lamp on/off 151 8 Rear interior lamps on/off 151 3 Ambient lighting on/off 151 9 Central locking switch 129 4 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off 151 a Central unlocking switch 129 b Left reading lamp on/off 151 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 151 6 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 274 c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 49 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in rear armrest compartment i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 50 Item Page 1 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 216 2 Switch for raising/lowering power tilt/sliding sunroof 216 3 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 4 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 267 Item Page 5 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 6 Button for opening/closing partition* 271 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 271 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*(vehicles without rear center seat*) Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 151 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 3 Right reading lamp on/off 151 4 Ambient lighting on/off 151 5 Roof lighting on/off 151 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting or roof lighting 151 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 274 8 Cover of compartment with: 앫 Ashtray 260 앫 Lighter 262 앫 Storage compartment* 263 9 Switch for opening/closing electrotransparent roof* screen 219 Item Page a Switch for making electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent 219 b Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 c Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 267 d Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 e Button for opening/closing partition* 271 f Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 271 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 274 h Rear interior lamps on/off 151 j Central unlocking switch 129 k Central locking switch 129 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 51 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* (vehicles with rear center seat*) Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 52 Item Page Item Page 1 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 281 7 Two-way intercom* on/off button 274 2 Right reading lamp on/off 151 8 Rear interior lamps on/off 151 3 Ambient lighting on/off 151 9 Central locking switch 129 4 Roof lighting on/off 151 a Central unlocking switch 129 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting or roof lighting 151 b Left reading lamp on/off 151 6 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 274 c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in rear armrest compartment Item Page 1 Switch for opening/closing electrotransparent roof* screen 219 2 Switch for making electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent 219 3 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 269 Item Page 4 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 267 5 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 269 6 Button for opening/closing partition* 271 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 271 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 53 At a glance Rear door control panel Rear door control panel Item Maybach 57 1 54 Page 1 Selection switch for right front passenger seat adjustment1 135 2 Selection switch for right rear seat adjustment1 135 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 141 4 Inside door handle 122 5 Seat ventilation* 139 6 Seat heating 138 7 Seat adjustment 132 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door window 209 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. At a glance Rear door control panel Maybach 62 Item 1 Page 1 Selection switch for right front passenger seat adjustment1 135 2 Selection switch for right rear seat adjustment1 135 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 141 4 Inside door handle 122 5 Switch for moving seat to fully reclined position 133 6 Seat ventilation* 139 7 Seat heating 138 8 Switch for moving seat to upright position 133 9 Seat adjustment 133 a Switches for opening/closing rear door window 209 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. 55 56 Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 57 Getting started Unlocking Unlocking 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the Unlocking with the SmartKey SmartKey. The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Maybach owners should pay special attention to the information given here. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment. SmartKey in the starter switch. For more information, see “SmartKey” (컄 page 114). SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4  Panic button (컄 page 102) Š Opening button for trunk Œ Unlock button ‹ Lock button Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 58 Getting started Unlocking Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can lock and unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch. Warning! G i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the door. i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. 왘 Get in the vehicle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. For more information, see “ SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 117). When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 59 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning! G 0 For removing SmartKey ! If the SmartKey can still not be turned, the 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment battery may not be sufficiently charged. 2 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. SmartKey 3 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position. All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 354). Starting position i When you switch on the ignition, the in- Starter switch 60 dicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. 앫 Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (컄 page 417). 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 421). To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the SmartKey” (컄 page 71). SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions. If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically. i The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. Getting started Unlocking Position 1 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button 앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) is switched on KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 앫 twice, the power supply is again switched off 1 USA only 2 Canada only Ignition (or position 2) The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. 왘 Do not depress the brake pedal. Position 0 Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button once, the power supply is again switched off. i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 71). This supplies power for all electrical consumers. All lamps in the instrument cluster (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 354). 61 Getting started Adjusting Adjusting Warning! G All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion. the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Warning! Seats Warning! G Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat belts are properly positioned on the body. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in 62 G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 68). Observe the following points: 앫 Adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. 앫 Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. 앫 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. 앫 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Getting started Adjusting Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 95). A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located on each door. ! When moving the seat, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Seat fore and aft adjustment 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 1. i Depending on the set height of the head restraint, the seat fore and aft position is automatically pre-set. Seat height 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Head restraint height 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Seat backrest tilt 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4. 컄컄 or 왘 Open the respective door. i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets you store settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel and rear view mirrors. 63 Getting started Adjusting Seat cushion depth Head restraint tilt Steering wheel 컄컄 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 until your legs are supported comfortably. Warning! Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Head restraint height 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 6. Warning! Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. 64 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. G Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. For more information, see “Seats” (컄 page 131). Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column up or down Easy-entry/exit feature 왘 Move the stalk up or down in direc- This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. When entering and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its uppermost position. tion of arrow 2. Make sure your legs can move freely and that all of the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. For more information, see “Heated steering wheel” (컄 page 276). The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE submenu of the control system (컄 page 177). Warning! 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). G You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. or To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following: 왘 Open the driver’s door. 앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk (컄 page 64). 앫 Press seat adjustment switch (컄 page 63). 앫 Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M (컄 page 140). i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets you store settings for the steering wheel together with settings for the rear view mirrors and seat positions. Adjusting steering column in or out 왘 Move stalk forward or backward in direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 65 Getting started Adjusting With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you 앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on or 앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61) once with the driver’s door closed. i The last set steering wheel position is stored when 앫 the ignition is switched off 앫 the position is stored in memory (컄 page 140) With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards when you: 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or 앫 66 open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 1 (컄 page 60). i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started. Warning! G Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions. Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets you save the rear view mirror settings together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat positions. Getting started Adjusting ! For information on how to reposition the Interior rear view mirror exterior mirror housing when it was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), see “Power folding exterior rear view mirrors” (컄 page 188). 왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror. For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 186). i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. Exterior rear view mirrors Warning! For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 186). G With the exterior rear view mirrors folded in when driving the vehicle, you cannot observe surrounding traffic conditions and which could result in an accident. Before driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior rear view mirrors are folded out. 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Adjustment button 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side G exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. 왘 Push adjustment button 3 up, down, Warning! left, or right according to the desired setting. 67 Getting started Driving Driving Warning! G Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury. Fastening the seat belts Warning! G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. 68 Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The airbags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are wearing their seat belts (컄 page 82). Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 95). A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Getting started Driving Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. Warning! G Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 85). belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips. 왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 un- til it clicks. 왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body. Proper use of seat belts: Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. 왘 Place the shoulder portion of the seat 1 2 3 4 Seat belt outlet Latch plate Buckle Release button 앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fastening. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm). 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen. 앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position. 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than 컄컄 one person at a time. 왘 Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet 1. 69 Getting started Driving 컄컄 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant restraint or toddler restraint or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. 앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. Warning! G Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Automatic transmission Starting the engine Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt. N Neutral Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts. For more information, see “Automatic transmission” (컄 page 178). Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 70 D Drive position Getting started Driving Starting with the SmartKey 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. 왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts (컄 page 60). i You can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically. You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever. 왘 Firmly depress the brake pedal during In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 앫 All the doors must be closed. The gear selector lever lock is released. once. The engine starts. For more information, see “Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 79). Starting difficulties For more information, see “Turning off the engine with the SmartKey” (컄 page 78). If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps: 왘 If you are starting the engine with Starting with KEYLESS-GO** Warning! the starting procedure. the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure. G As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 왘 If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO**, close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only i If the SmartKey’s battery is discharged, you cannot start the vehicle using the KEYLESS-GO function. Use the SmartKey instead. 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. or 왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey 컄컄 with KEYLESS-GO**. 왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 71 Getting started Driving 컄컄 왘 Repeat the starting procedure (컄 page 70). Remember that extend- ed starting attempts can drain the battery. 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 421). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system. 왘 Notify an authorized Maybach Parking brake Warning! Warning! G Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged. Studio. G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on handle 1. The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal 72 Getting started Driving ! If you hear a warning signal and the mes- Driving off 왘 Firmly depress brake pedal. The gear selector lever lock is released. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D or R. Warning! G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. ! In order to avoid damaging the transmission, 앫 wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion 앫 place the gear selector lever in position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped. 왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator ped- sage RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Release the parking brake. ! Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine. Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down. The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated (컄 page 176). You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position B. The low beam headlamps and the green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch come on. al. For more information, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 297). 73 Getting started Driving High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Combination switch Combination switch Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher 1 Turn signal, right 2 Turn signal, left 왘 Push combination switch in direction 왘 Press combination switch in direction 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers of arrow 1. of arrow 1 or 2. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). The high beam headlamps and the high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster come on (컄 page 22). The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K in the instrument cluster flashes (컄 page 22). ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the windshield wipers blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 75). For more information on headlamps, see “Lighting” (컄 page 142). The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. i To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times. 74 Getting started Driving Switching on windshield wipers 왘 Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windshield wipers off I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed Intermittent wiping ! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result. ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry. Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. 왘 Turn the combination switch to posi- tion I. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicIe from being sprayed. Intermittent wiping will be continued when 앫 i To prevent smears on the windshield or noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining. ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. 앫 all doors are closed 앫 and 앫 the gear selector lever is in position D or R 앫 the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Single wipe 왘 Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point. The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid. Wiping with windshield washer fluid 왘 Press the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 1 past the resistance point. The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid. remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or or 앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location and turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61) and open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from the starter switch) before attempting to remove any blockage. 앫 Remove blockage. 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the combination switch position I: 앫 Set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed. 앫 Have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. 75 Getting started Driving For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system” (컄 page 311). Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: 왘 Do not start the engine under any cir- 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. 앫 The engine electronics may not be operating properly. 왘 Notify local fire and/or police author- 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it. If the extent of the damage cannot be determined: 왘 Give very little gas. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an au- thorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C) The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool off. 왘 Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 310). 왘 If problem persists, call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). 76 In case of accident cumstances. ities. 왘 Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If no damage can be determined on the 앫 major assemblies 앫 fuel system 앫 engine mount: 왘 Start the engine in the usual manner. Getting started Parking and locking Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows. Warning! Slowly release brake pedal. Parking brake 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. 앫 Warning! Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61). G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake or steer the vehicle. Warning! 앫 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. G Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged. Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake. G Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 앫 Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal. 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 앫 Move the gear selector lever to position P. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal 컄컄 77 Getting started Parking and locking 컄컄 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2. Warning! When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (컄 page 70). When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. Turning off the engine Warning! G Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the engine not running, there is no power assistance or the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. 왘 Place the gear selector lever in Switching off headlamps 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (컄 page 73). position P. i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P. For more information, see “Lighting” (컄 page 142). On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the curb. Turning off the engine with the SmartKey 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. 78 Getting started Parking and locking i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off. Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO** 왘 Place the gear selector lever in P. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61) until the engine shuts off. With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the driver‘s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch. The immobilizer is activated. i In an emergency you can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds. i If you hear a warning signal, you have tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P. Place the gear selector lever in P. Releasing seat belts 왘 Press the seat belt release button (컄 page 69). Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate. ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Locking Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and the trunk. 79 Getting started Parking and locking i If you hear a warning signal you have for- Locking with KEYLESS-GO** gotten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver’s door. In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display. Switch off the headlamps. Locking with the SmartKey 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (컄 page 58). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. For more information, see “SmartKey” (컄 page 114). 1 Lock button 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock button 1 on the outside door handle or on the trunk lid (컄 page 126). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. For more information, see “ SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 117). 80 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems 81 Safety and Security Occupant safety Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle. The restraint systems are 앫 Seat belts (컄 page 92) 앫 Child restraints (컄 page 95) 앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 99) Additional protection potential provide 앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 95). The SRS system conducts a self-test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running. This facilitates early detection of malfunctions. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started. 앫 Airbags (컄 page 83) The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running. 앫 Airbag control unit (with crash sensors) A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp: 앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 95) 앫 fails to go out after approximately 4 seconds after the engine was started 앫 does not come on at all 앫 comes on after the engine was started or while driving Airbag system components with 앫 Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp (컄 page 91) 앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) (컄 page 88) Although independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other. 82 Warning! G Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat belts and anchors, emergency tensioning devices, seat belt force limiters or airbags) or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended. Airbags or emergency tensioning devices, for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your local authorized Maybach Studio or call our Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (1-866-367-6292) for details. Airbags Warning! Warning! G Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The activation of the airbags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body. Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye: 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. 컄컄 83 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual. 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates. 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. 84 Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. Warning! G Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. There is a possibility for a side impact airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a front side impact airbag and/or rear side impact airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the front side impact airbag and/or the rear side impact airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the front side impact airbag and/or the rear side impact airbag be deployed. Safety and Security Occupant safety (2) Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts, and for children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear mounted seat side impact airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Maybach Studio at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Maybach Studio or call our Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA), or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). i Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain airbags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for airbags to provide their supplemental protection. In case of other types of impacts and impacts below airbag deployment thresholds, airbags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag Warning! G 앫 Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced. 앫 No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, seat covers, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger front airbag cover, outboard sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). 앫 Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to make sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants. 컄컄 85 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts. 앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. 앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when window curtain airbag is deployed. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. 앫 Airbag system components will be hot after an airbag has inflated. Do not touch. 앫 앫 86 In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from airbag deployment. Warning! Front airbags G Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. 1 Driver front airbag 2 Front passenger front airbag Driver’s and front passenger front airbags are deployed: 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the side impact airbags Safety and Security Occupant safety i The front airbags in this vehicle have been Side impact airbags Window curtain airbags 1 Front side impact airbags 2 Rear side impact airbags 1 Front window curtain airbag 2 Rear window curtain airbag The side impact airbags are deployed: The side window curtain airbags are deployed: designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the airbag control unit. On the front passenger side, the front airbag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (컄 page 88). The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the airbag. The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The front passenger front airbag will only be deployed if: 앫 앫 앫 the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle 앫 independently of the front airbags the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (컄 page 91) The side impact airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold. the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold The front passenger side impact airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied. 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle 앫 independently of the front airbags 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers The window curtain airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold. 87 Safety and Security Occupant safety Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System (OCS) automatically turns the front passenger front airbag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat. i The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact airbag, the window curtain airbag and the emergency tensioning device. Occupants must sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant’s weight category. Furthermore, the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times. 88 i If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio. Only seat accessories approved by Maybach may be used. Both driver and the front passenger should always use the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned. Warning! G If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the seat until the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat. More information about airbag display messages (컄 page 369). In the event of a collision, the airbag control unit will not allow front passenger front airbag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. Safety and Security Occupant safety When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. With the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp out, the front passenger front airbag is activated. When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is activated. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front airbag is deactivated and will not be deployed. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front airbag is activated and will be deployed: 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 앫 independently of the side impact airbags If the front passenger front airbag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by: 앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the airbag control unit 앫 front passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS). Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the 컄컄 child. 89 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating airbag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with airbag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front airbag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front airbag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the airbag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat. 90 앫 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front airbag inflates. If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-monthold child, the front passenger front airbag may or may not be activated (컄 page 86). i Deployment of the driver front airbag does not mean that the front passenger front airbag also should have deployed. The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 88) may have determined: 앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint - both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front airbag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front airbag 앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult) or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint - instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front airbag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front airbag Safety and Security Occupant safety The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located on the upper part of the front center console. Warning! G If the 1 indicator lamp and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System. The front passenger front airbag will be deactivated in this case. In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS: 앫 1 Indicator lamp The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 (컄 page 60). Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the ruffled storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category. 앫 Do not place objects under and/or around the front passenger seat. 앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats. 앫 Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front passenger seat. 앫 Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects. 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. 앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category. 앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio. Self-test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button once or twice, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out. 91 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp should not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Maybach Studio before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 369). Warning! G Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of child seats. Seat belts The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. For more information on fastening seat belts, see “Getting started” (컄 page 68). i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 95). Warning! G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. 92 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Warning! USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY 앫 Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front airbag, front passenger front airbag, side impact airbags, window curtain airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side (side impact, window curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers 컄컄 (window curtain airbags). Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Warning! G Only use seat belts which have been approved for Maybach vehicles. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to failure of the seat belts. G Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 93 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The shoulder belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. 앫 Never wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries. 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects. 앫 Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the seat belt to manage impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries. 94 앫 Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s seat belt is fastened. If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with front doors closed, 앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened. 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt are fastened. If you and/or your passenger release the seat belt during driving, the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and the warning chime sounds. If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the warning chime stops sounding, the seat belt telltale < stops flashing but continues to be illuminated. After a vehicle standstill the warning chime is reactivated and the seat belt telltale < is flashing again if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The seat belt telltale < will only go out if both the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 357). Safety and Security Occupant safety Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and seat belt force limiters. The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases: 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers 앫 if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 82). In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Seat belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened. When activated, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the seat belts. Seat belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. Warning! G Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle: 왘 Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child. 왘 Make sure the infant or child is prop- erly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Maybach Studio. Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt An automatic comfort-fit feature for front seats reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use. Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could 앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle 앫 be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. If children open a door, they could 앫 injure other persons 앫 get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic 컄컄 95 Safety and Security Occupant safety 컄컄 Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading” (컄 page 247) and “Useful features” (컄 page 248). Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child’s risk of injury in the event of 앫 strong braking maneuvers 앫 sudden changes of direction 앫 an accident To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. Warning! G Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. i For more information on child seats with Infant and child restraint systems mounting fittings for tether anchorages (컄 page 98). We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. For information on LATCH-type child seat anchors (컄 page 99). All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The seat belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the child restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. 96 A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Warning! G According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Safety and Security Occupant safety Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating airbag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with airbag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front airbag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front airbag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the airbag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat. 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front airbag inflates. 앫 If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front airbag may or may not be activated (컄 page 86). 97 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Installing infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions. Head restraint must be positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back. 왘 Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/ shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. 98 1 Cover of top anchorage ring 왘 Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully upright position (컄 page 131). 왘 Open cover 1 to access anchorage ring. 왘 Guide tether strap between head re- straints and top of seat back. 2 Hook 3 Anchorage ring 왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3. i For safety, please make sure the hook 2 has attached to the ring 3 beyond the safety catch, as illustrated. Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Safety and Security Occupant safety 왘 Close cover after removing the tether strap. Warning! Warning! G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. G Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions. To enable the child seat to perform its protective function, Child seat anchors – LATCH-type 앫 the rear seat backrest must be fully upright (컄 page 131) This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings. 앫 the seat cushion must be tilted fully downwards (컄 page 131). The child seat must be firmly attached to the right and left side anchors 2 (컄 page 100). Warning! G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. i Vehicles with a rear center seat*: Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed. i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. 99 Safety and Security Occupant safety The LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest. t. Override switch for rear passenger compartment You can disable select functions in the rear passenger compartment for added safety (for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment). The override switch is located in the driver’s door. You can disable the following functions in the rear passenger compartment: 앫 rear door windows operation (컄 page 209) 앫 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchor cigarette lighter in the rear (컄 page 262) 앫 왘 Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully upright position (컄 page 131). adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear (컄 page 135) 앫 왘 Adjust the seat cushion tilt fully downwards (컄 page 131). 12-V socket in the rear center console (컄 page 266) 앫 closing the partition* from the rear (컄 page 271) 왘 Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 100 1 Deactivating override switch 2 Activating override switch Activating override switch 왘 Press switch 2. The functions in the rear are disabled. i The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in the driver’s door. Safety and Security Occupant safety Deactivating override switch 왘 Press switch 1. The functions in the rear are enabled again. Warning! G Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. For information, see “Power windows” (컄 page 209). 101 Safety and Security Panic alarm Panic alarm i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 왘 Press  button again. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 왘 Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 1  Panic button i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 102 Activating 왘 Press and hold  button for at least 1 second. An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly. Deactivating or KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch. or 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems: 앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) 앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) 앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 앫 Electro-hydraulic brake system Warning! Braking ABS G The following factors increase the risk of accidents: 앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces 앫 Following another vehicle too closely The ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake system cannot reduce this risk. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. i In winter operation, the ®maximum effec- tiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP and electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved with winter tires (M + S tires), or snow chains as required. Warning! G Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure. The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the electro-hydraulic brake system, you will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal. 왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal. Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes whenever the ABS is activated which can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Emergency brake maneuver 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. 103 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS and the ESP® are also switched off. When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending the braking distance. Warning! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. For more information on ABS, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 354). 104 BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. 왘 Apply continuous full braking pres- sure until the emergency braking situation is over. The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated. Warning! G If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. Warning! G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Safety and Security Driving safety systems ESP® The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling. The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is engaged. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. Warning! G Never switch off the ESP® when you see the ABS/ ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows: in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ! Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine must be turn off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. 앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front/ rear axle raised. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. i The ESP® will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (컄 page 436). Warning! G The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never be exploited For more information on ESP®, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 354) and (컄 page 368). Electronic traction system The electronic traction system is a component of the ESP®. The electronic traction system improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions by applying the brakes to a spinning wheel. 105 Safety and Security Driving safety systems When you switch off the ESP®, the electronic traction system is still enabled. Warning! G If you are driving too fast, the electronic traction system cannot reduce the risk of an accident. The electronic traction system cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off the ESP® in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as: 앫 you cannot activate the cruise control or the Distronic** system 앫 the cruise control or the Distronic** system switch off if currently activated 앫 when driving with snow chains 앫 in deep snow 앫 in sand or gravel i When the ESP® is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle. Warning! Switching off the ESP® Warning! 106 The ESP® switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. Switch on the ESP® immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a wheel is spinning. G The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers. G When you switch off the ESP® 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle 앫 the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip 앫 the traction control will still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel 앫 the ESP® continues to operate when you are braking 1 ESP® switch 왘 With the engine running, press ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on. The ESP® is switched off. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP® is switched off. Vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers reduces. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®. ! Avoid spinning of a drive® wheel for an ex- tended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Switching on the ESP® 왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/ ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out. You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP® switched on. Electro-hydraulic brake system The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have increased braking safety and improved braking comfort. Warning! G Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the instrument cluster, for example by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) red brake warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 360). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display (컄 page 364). Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360) and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on while driving (see page 378 to page 381). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423). 107 Safety and Security Driving safety systems The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you: 앫 unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO** 앫 open the driver’s or passenger door 앫 turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 앫 in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, press the start/stop button (컄 page 61) on gear selector lever once 앫 depress the brake pedal 앫 release the parking brake i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated when the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system pump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and depress it again and the sound soon ceases. If you experience a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel while driving and the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (see page 378 to page 381), the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow 108 the instructions of the warning message(s) and have the brake system checked immediately. Warning! G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. The electrohydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver’s or passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is in position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury. The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically: 앫 approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from outside 앫 approximately 2 minutes after you 앫 turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey 앫 pressed the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button (컄 page 61) to turn off the engine or power supply and opened the driver’s door (with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch) Safety and Security Driving safety systems Note on driving with the electro-hydraulic brake system 앫 Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads. Warning! 앫 Only components approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may impair the safety of your vehicle. G Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. 앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered roads, you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle. This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks and help prevent corrosion. 앫 On long and steep grades, shift to a lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear. 앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. 109 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Anti-theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle. Activating With the SmartKey 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start- er switch. With KEYLESS-GO** 왘 Turn off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61). 왘 Open the driver’s door. Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens 앫 a door 앫 the trunk 앫 the hood the immobilizer. In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). 110 The indicator lamp located below the hazard warning flasher switch in on the upper part of the front center console. The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. The alarm system will also be triggered when 앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle 앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key 앫 someone opens a door from the inside 앫 someone opens the trunk with the emergency release button 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). i Starting the engine will also deactivate Arming the alarm system i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. 1 Indicator lamp 왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm system is armed. Safety and Security Anti-theft systems i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: Canceling the alarm 앫 a door 앫 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter the trunk Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. Disarming the alarm system 왘 Unlock your vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed. i The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if no door was opened. With the SmartKey switch. or 왘 Press Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. With KEYLESS-GO** 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. Tow-away alarm Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. Arming the tow-away alarm 왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. or KEYLESS-GO**. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds. Disarming the tow-away alarm To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. The button is located on the overhead control panel. 111 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Canceling the alarm With the SmartKey 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. or 왘 Press Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. With KEYLESS-GO** 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. 1 Tow-away alarm off button The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. 왘 Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm if the ignition is switched on. 왘 Press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button comes on briefly. 왘 Exit the vehicle and lock it with the SmartKey or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) with the lock button at each outside door handle or trunk lid. i When you unlock your vehicle, the towaway protection disarms automatically. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again. 112 or 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Power windows Power tilt/sliding sunroof Electrotransparent roof* Driving systems Loading Useful features 113 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking In the “Controls in detail” section, you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment. SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 앫 the doors 앫 the trunk 앫 the fuel filler flap The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started” (컄 page 58) and (컄 page 77). SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button (컄 page 102) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. 114 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 417). If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. (1) This device may not cause interference, and Factory setting (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Global unlocking 왘 Press button Œ. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i When you unlock the vehicle, the electrohydraulic brake system is activated (컄 page 107). i You can also open and close the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if: ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the ve- 앫 hicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained. neither a door nor the trunk is opened 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch 앫 the central locking switch is not activated 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary (컄 page 405). 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk (컄 page 402). 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk (컄 page 127). 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking Selective setting Global locking 왘 Press button ‹. If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. 왘 Press button ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 6 (컄 page 114) flashes twice. The SmartKey will then function as follows: Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap 왘 Press button Œ once. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global unlocking 왘 Press button Œ twice. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. 116 With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. Restoring to factory setting 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. Warning! When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unit. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you grasp an outside door handle. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks 앫 the doors 앫 the trunk 앫 the fuel filler flap G SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button (컄 page 102) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp i When any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the vehicle is centrally unlocked. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 117 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i When you unlock the vehicle, the electrohydraulic brake system is activated (컄 page 107). i You can also open and close the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then either the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained. 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary (컄 page 405). 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk (컄 page 402). 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk (컄 page 127). 앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 417). Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey (컄 page 114). 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with button ‹). 앫 Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with: If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Electronic items such as a mobile phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 앫 Metallic objects such as coins or metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system. 118 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the trunk lid. 앫 If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking 앫 앫 In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle. 앫 The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator. 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO). 앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button or trying to lock the vehicle with the outside door handle the message KEY NOT DETECTED appears in the multifunction display 앫 with the engine running, the message KEY NOT DETECTED appears in the multifunction display while driving off. Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket). 앫 If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can turn it off again with: 앫 the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 앫 the SmartKey inserted in the starter switch, when gear selector lever in position P 앫 Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle. Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle): If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, no message appears in the multifunction display. Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle): When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, the message KEY STILL IN VEHICLE appears in the multifunction display. The vehicle will not be locked. 119 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global locking Global unlocking 왘 Press the lock button on an outside door handle (컄 page 80) or trunk lid (컄 page 121). 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if: 앫 앫 neither a door nor the trunk is opened the central locking switch is not activated With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also lock the vehicle using the KEYLESS-GO lock button on the trunk lid (컄 page 121) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch (컄 page 126). Selective setting i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks. 앫 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ 앫 an outside door handle is splashed with water, or you attempt to clean an outside door handle. simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 6 (컄 page 117) flashes twice. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows: 120 Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap 왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door han- dle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global unlocking 왘 Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global locking 왘 Press the lock button on an outside door handle (컄 page 80). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also lock the vehicle using the KEYLESS-GO lock button on the trunk lid (컄 page 121) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch (컄 page 126). Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Restoring to factory setting 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 6 (컄 page 117) flashes twice. Global locking using KEYLESS-GO lock button on the trunk lid Checking batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 왘 Press button Œ or ‹. Battery check lamp 6 (컄 page 117) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order. ! If battery check lamp 6 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries (컄 page 405). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Maybach Studio. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** If you lose a SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you should do the following: 왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company. 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced. Your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to supply you with a replacement. 1 KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid 왘 Press lock button 1. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on an outside door handle (컄 page 80) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch (컄 page 126). 121 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i If the vehicle has previously been locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: 앫 Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. 앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver’s door. In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display. Switch off the headlamps. 122 Front doors 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- tive front door to open door. If door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up. Rear doors 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the re- spective rear door to unlock door. 왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- tive rear door to open door. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) You can close the rear doors automatically. Warning! The remote rear door closing switch is above the rear door. Opening the trunk Warning! G Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging to your health. G Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. You can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door opening when closing the door. Be especially careful when small children are around. In case of danger, release the remote rear door closing switch to stop the closing procedure. 1 Remote rear door closing switch 왘 Pull switch 1 until the door is com- pletely closed. 왘 If necessary, pull the door into its lock by hand. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. ! The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. 왘 Release switch 1 to interrupt proce- dure. i You can also close the rear doors by hand. 123 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk from the outside Opening the trunk from the inside Closing the trunk Warning! G Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging to your health. i Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. 1 Handle 1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch 왘 Press and hold button Š on the 왘 Pull switch 1 until the trunk lid SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** until the trunk unlocks and begins to open. or 왘 Pull on handle 1. In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**: The vehicle must be unlocked. ! To stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately (컄 page 127). 124 begins to open. The trunk opens. You will see the symbol Ê in the multifunction display until you close the trunk. ! To stop the opening procedure, press or pull trunk opening/closing switch 1. i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately (컄 page 127). i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals flash three times. If you are carrying a second SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you, you can still lock the vehicle. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the trunk from the inside Warning! Closing the trunk from the outside automatically G Warning! Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the remote trunk opening/closing switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To interrupt the closing procedure, release the remote trunk opening/closing switch. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch 왘 Press and hold switch 1 until the symbol Ê disappears from the multifunction display and the trunk is closed. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: 앫 press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 앫 press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch 1 (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel) 앫 press the KEYLESS-GO** locking/closing switch 1 (컄 page 126) 앫 pull the trunk lid handle To interrupt the closing procedure: 왘 Release the remote trunk opening/ closing switch. i You can also close the trunk by hand. G Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the trunk closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 125 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking You can close the trunk separately. Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO** Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO** 1 Trunk closing switch 1 Trunk closing switch 왘 Press switch 1 briefly. The trunk closes. i You can also close the trunk by hand. 1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. 왘 Press switch 1 briefly. With all doors closed, the locking knobs in the doors move down and the trunk starts to close automatically. All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking once the trunk has closed completely. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also close the trunk by hand. 126 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk emergency release With the emergency release button, the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk. Illumination of the emergency release button: 앫 The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. 앫 The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. Valet trunk i To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** less its mechanical key with the vehicle. i The emergency release button does not unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. i If the vehicle has previously been locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the antitheft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: 1 Emergency release button 왘 Briefly press emergency release button 1. The trunk unlocks and opens slightly. 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: 1 Neutral position 2 Locked 앫 왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 124). 왘 Push up the trunk lid to fully open. i The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion. Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. 앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. 왘 Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey (컄 page 401). 왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock. 왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the trunk. 127 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked. i You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key. 왘 Turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise to neutral position 1 (컄 page 127) and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk. You can now open the trunk (컄 page 123). Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid It is not necessary to slam the door or trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power assist mechanism draws doors and trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once the door or trunk lid has been latched. When the pneumatic power-assisted mechanism has stopped, doors and/or trunk can be re-opened. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door or trunk opening when closing a door or the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. 128 Power closing assist for doors 왘 Press the doors gently past the initial engage position into the lock. The doors close automatically. Warning! G Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. Power closing assist for trunk lid 왘 Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. The trunk closes automatically. In case of danger, pull the respective inside or outside door handle, or pull on trunk lid handle. Warning! To prevent personal injury, never activate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch. Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. G Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Locking and unlocking from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle 앫 is pushed or towed 앫 is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system (컄 page 176). Warning! G Driver’s switches 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive. The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively. Your vehicle is equipped with locking and unlocking switches for the driver and rear seat passengers. Rear seat passengers’ switches (example illustration from Maybach 57) 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 129 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking 왘 Press central locking switch 1. If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. Unlocking 왘 Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks. i You can open a locked door from inside Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 57 with rear center seat*) at any time. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2. 130 Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 62 with rear center seat*) If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1: 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is set to factory settings, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is set to selective settings, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked Controls in detail Seats Seats For more information on seat adjustment, see “Adjusting” (컄 page 62). Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Rear seats Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat belts are properly positioned on the body. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 68). Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Head restraint tilt For information on front seat head restraint adjustment, see “Adjusting” (컄 page 64). Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Maybach 57 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions 131 Controls in detail Seats Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 57) 왘 Open the respective door. i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected (컄 page 135). 왘 Press switch up or down in direction i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets you store settings for the seat positions. Head restraint tilt i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted. ! When moving the seat, make sure there Maybach 62 are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. 왘 Adjust the side cushions of the head direction of arrow 2. Seat backrest tilt 왘 Press switch forward or backward in removal and installation of the head restraints. 왘 In addition to adjusting the head re- straint tilt using the corresponding power control on the rear door control panel, the angle of the head restraint can also be adjusted manually. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa. 1 2 3 4 5 Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). or 132 왘 Press switch forward or backward in i Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for easier restraints by hand. that it is as close to the head as possible. of arrow 1. direction of arrow 3 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions i Adjust the head restraint in such a way Head restraint height Seat fore and aft adjustment 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4. Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 5 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Controls in detail Seats 왘 Press and hold switch 1 until seat is Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 62) in desired position. i To adjust settings for the right rear pas- To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 1. senger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected (컄 page 135). 왘 To adjust seat to upright position, i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets press switch 2. you store settings for the seat positions. 왘 Press and hold switch 2 until seat is ! When moving the seat, make sure there in desired position. are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted. To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a Fully reclined position Upright position Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Leg rest length Leg rest tilt 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). or 왘 Open the respective door. Fully reclined/upright position 왘 To adjust seat to fully reclined posi- tion, press switch 1. Head restraint height 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3. Head restraint tilt 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 133). Seat backrest tilt 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and 컄컄 vice versa. 133 Controls in detail Seats 컄컄 Seat cushion depth 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 6 until your legs are supported comfortably. Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 7 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Seat fore and aft adjustment 왘 Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 8 (컄 page 133). Extending and retracting the rear seat head restraints Warning! G For safety reasons, always drive with the rear seat head restraints in the extended position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the retracting/extending operation of the head restraints. Retracting rear seat head restraints 왘 Press switch 1. The rear seat head restraints retract. Extending rear seat head restraints 왘 Press switch 1 again. The rear outer seat head restraints extend to your last set position. or Leg rest length 왘 Adjust the head restraints with the 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 9 (컄 page 133) to adjust seat adjustment switches in the rear passenger compartment. the leg rest length. i When you fasten your seat belt in the rear, the respective rear outer seat head restraint extends to your last set position. Leg rest tilt 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of arrow a (컄 page 133) to adjust i The rear center seat* head restraint cannot be extended using the switch in the front center console. Use the switch on the lower right side of the rear center seat. the leg rest tilt. 1 Switch for rear seat head restraints 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 134 i You can only retract the rear seat head restraints when no rear seat passenger is wearing a seat belt. Controls in detail Seats Rear center seat* head restraint adjustment Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Setting front passenger seat position from rear This function lets you adjust the position of the front passenger seat from the right rear passenger seat. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Extending 2 Retracting 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). or 왘 Open a rear door. 왘 Press switch 1 and hold it. The rear seat head restraint extends until you release the switch. 왘 Press switch 2 and hold it. The rear seat head restraint retracts until you release the switch. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the rear center seat head restraint can be operated when a rear door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 Front passenger seat adjustment Right rear passenger seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Head restraint height 135 Controls in detail Seats Warning! G When adjusting the front passenger seat, make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the passenger front airbag as possible. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver. Make sure no one can be caught or injured while the seat is being adjusted. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! Do not move the front passenger seat completely forward if objects are stored in the front passenger-side footwell. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). or 왘 Open the right rear passenger door. 왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 135). 136 왘 Adjust passenger seat to desired position using switches 3 (컄 page 135) through 6 (컄 page 135). 왘 To adjust right rear passenger seat, press button 2 (컄 page 135). i If you simultaneously operate an adjustment switch in the rear and on the front passenger side, no adjustment will take place. i Maybach 62: If the rear seat is in reclined position, the adjustment of the front passenger’s 앫 seat backrest and 앫 longitudinal position Multicontour seats The multicontour seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support. The seat cushion movement, seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right side of the seat on the driver side, or the left side of the seat on the passenger side. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: The rear center seat is not a multicontour seat. toward the rear is restricted. i Adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 100). Driver’s seat/front passenger seat 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Controls in detail Seats The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 57 are located on the inner side of the seat. The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 62 are located on the outer side of the seat. Shoulder region support 왘 Press æ or ç on switch 2. The air cushion inflates or deflates. Side bolster adjustment 왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 3. i When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory, and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted. Massage function (PULSE) Rear seats (Maybach 57) Rear seats (Maybach 62) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Lumbar region support 왘 Press k or j on rocker switch 1. This selects the air cushion you wish to adjust. You can reduce muscle tension during long trips by periodically using the massage function. 왘 Press button 4. The indicator lamp on button 4 comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically. i The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes. The indicator lamp goes out. 왘 Press æ or ç on rocker switch 1. The air cushion inflates or deflates. 137 Controls in detail Seats Switching on seat heating Seat heating The red indicator lamps in the switch show the heating level selected. 왘 Press switch 1. Three red indicator lamps in the switch come on. Level 3 왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until de- Three indicator lamps on (highest level). sired seat heating level is reached. Switching off seat heating After approximately 5 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2. 2 Two indicator lamps on. After approximately 10 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level). After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off. off No indicator lamp on. i The rear center seat* cannot be heated. 138 왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all inExample illustration from Maybach with seat ventilation* 1 Seat heating switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). dicator lamps in the switch go out. i If one or all of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically. The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Controls in detail Seats Seat ventilation* The blue indicator lamps in the switch show the ventilation level selected: Level 3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level). 2 Two indicator lamps on. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level). off No indicator lamp on. Switching on seat ventilation Switching off seat ventilation 왘 Press switch 1. 왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 139) repeat- Three blue indicator lamps in the switch come on. 왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until the desired seat ventilation level is reached. i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat can be activated using summer opening feature (컄 page 211). edly until all indicator lamps go out. i If one or all of the lamps flash on the seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on. The seat ventilation switches off automatically. The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. i The rear center seat* cannot be ventilated. 1 Seat ventilation switch 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 139 Controls in detail Memory function Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on airbags (컄 page 83) for proper seat positioning. In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision. With the memory function you can store up to five different settings. Each stored position on the driver’s side includes the following settings: 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position 앫 Multicontour seat: previously saved setting 앫 Steering wheel position 앫 Interior rear view mirror position 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors position Warning! Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2. G Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Each stored position on the front passenger side and in the rear passenger compartment includes the following settings: 140 앫 Front and rear outer seats, backrest and head restraint positions 앫 Multicontour seats: previously saved settings The memory button and stored position buttons are located on the respective door. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Memory button M 2 Memory position buttons 1 - 5 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). or 왘 Open the respective door. Controls in detail Memory function Storing positions in memory 왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 62). 왘 On the driver’s side: adjust the steering wheel (컄 page 64) and the rear view mirrors (컄 page 66) to the de- sired position. 왘 Press memory button M. 왘 Release memory button M and push memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 within 3 seconds. Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. For information on activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” (컄 page 187). The buttons are located on the driver’s door. 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button 1. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected. 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. 왘 Press memory button 3. 왘 Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad- justment button 2. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move. All the settings are stored at the selected position. i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again. Recalling positions from memory ! Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an extremely reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. First move seat backrest to an upright position. 왘 Press and hold memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 until the seat, steering wheel and mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions. i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored positions. 1 Exterior rear view mirror (passengerside) 2 Adjustment button 3 Memory button M 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 141 Controls in detail Lighting Lighting Exterior lamp switch For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see “Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 73) and “Turn signals” (컄 page 74). 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) 3 M Off i If you drive in countries where vehicles Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 144) drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at an authorized Maybach Studio. i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor your steering angle and driving speed, then automatically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps. 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) 4 U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 144) Exterior lamp switch 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) 6 B Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward. The tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lamps also come on. 7 ‡ Front fog lamps 8 † Rear fog lamp 142 Controls in detail Lighting i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver’s door. Warning! In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display. If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, Switch off the headlamps. 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. 앫 the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi- tion B. Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light: 앫 Low beam headlamps 앫 Tail and parking lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps G To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U. With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. i USA only: With the automatic headlamp mode activated you can switch on the high beam headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. 143 Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Canada only USA only 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. tivated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps. By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)” (컄 page 173). The high beam flasher is available at all times. i With the daytime running lamp mode ac- For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch in position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. tivated and the exterior lamp switch in position M, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps. When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a 3-minute delay. The high beam flasher is available at all times. position M or U. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on. In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally: 앫 tail and parking lamps 앫 license plate lamps 앫 side marker lamps i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, you cannot switch off the low beam headlamps manually. For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. i With the daytime running lamp mode ac- When the engine is running, and you 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps and the side marker lamps switch on additionally. 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 407). 144 For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch in position B or U to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (컄 page 142). Controls in detail Lighting Locator lighting and night security illumination Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system section under “Setting locator lighting” (컄 page 173) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 174). Fog lamps Front fog lamps 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps B (컄 page 73). first stop. 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop. The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch goes out. The front fog lamps switch on. The front fog lamps remain lit. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 142). The rear fog lamp switches off. Combination switch 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch. Warning! G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation. The front fog lamps switch off. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out. Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) 왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps B (컄 page 73). 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to sec- ond stop. Combination switch The front fog lamps and the rear fog lamp switch on. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on (컄 page 142). i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U. For switching on the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B first. 145 Controls in detail Lighting High beam 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to position B (컄 page 142). 왘 Push the combination switch in direc- Corner-illuminating lamps The corner-illuminating lamps improve illumination of the area in the direction into which you are turning. tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam. The corner-illuminating lamps will operate with the engine running and with: The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on. 앫 왘 Pull the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. High beam flasher 왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2. Driving forward Switching on corner-illuminating lamps 왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal (컄 page 74), depending on whether you are turning left or right. The respective corner-illuminating lamp comes on and illuminates the area in the direction into which you are turning. the exterior lamp switch in position B (컄 page 142) or 앫 the exterior lamp switch in position U (컄 page 142) or 앫 or 왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc- tion. the daytime running lamp mode activated (컄 page 173) i With the automatic headlamp mode activated: The corner-illuminating lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. i If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched on, the corner-illuminating function is not available. The corner-illuminating lamp on the side of your steering direction comes on. i If you have switched on the turn signal for one side but turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction, the corner-illuminating lamp comes on for the side indicated by the turn signal. The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes. Afterward, it goes out even if the turn signal is still switched on. i The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one direction and then again in the other direction shortly thereafter. 146 Controls in detail Lighting i The corner-illuminating lamps will come Driving in reverse on automatically depending on the steering angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. Switching on corner-illuminating lamps If the corner-illuminating lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle. Switching off the corner-illuminating lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the corner-illuminating lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal. The corner-illuminating lamp opposite to your steering direction comes on. Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle. Switching off corner-illuminating lamps The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an airbag deploys. 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position R. 왘 Place the gear selector lever out of position R. The respective corner-illuminating lamp goes out. The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the front center console. If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position. i There may be a brief delay before the corner-illuminating lamps switch off. 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 147 Controls in detail Lighting Switching on hazard warning flasher 왘 Press the hazard warning flasher switch 1. Interior lighting in the front The controls are located in the overhead control panel. All turn signals flash. i The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode. Deactivating i With the hazard warning flasher activat- 왘 Press automatic control switch 3. ed and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signal will operate when the ignition is switched on. The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you: Switching off hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again. i If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off. Automatic control 1 2 3 4 5 Left front reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Automatic control on/off Front interior lighting on/off Right front reading lamp on/off 앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door Activating 왘 Press automatic control switch 3. The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you: ! An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically. 앫 unlock the vehicle Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 open a door The interior lighting switches off automatically following a preset time delay (컄 page 175). For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off” (컄 page 175). 148 Controls in detail Lighting i If a door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes. Manual control Switching front reading lamps on and off The front reading lamps are integrated into the interior rear view mirror. 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1 Switching front interior lighting on and off 왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4. The front interior lighting switches on. or 5 to switch on the desired front reading lamp. Interior lighting in the rear The control panel is located between the rear seats. ! Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp. 왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4 again. The front interior lighting switches off. Switching rear interior lighting on and off 왘 Press rear interior lighting switch 2. The rear interior lighting switches on. 왘 Press rear interior lighting switch 2 again. The rear interior lighting switches off. Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Ambient lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Rear interior lighting on/off 149 Controls in detail Lighting Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*) Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Ambient lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Rear interior lighting on/off 150 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off Controls in detail Lighting Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Headliner lamps on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer) 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Headliner lamps on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Roof lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/roof lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off 151 Controls in detail Lighting Rear reading lamps Headliner lamps 왘 Press respective switch 1 or 2 In Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof, the headliner lamps can be illuminated. at X symbol to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps on. 왘 Press respective switch 1 or 2 at X symbol again to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps off. Ambient lighting Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* (vehicles with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer) 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Roof lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/roof lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off The ambient lighting switches on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. You can switch on or off ambient lighting manually. 왘 Press the switch at the ð symbol to switch the ambient lighting on. 왘 Press the switch at the ð symbol to switch the ambient lighting off. Manual control Dimming ambient lighting, headliner lamps and roof lighting* Rear interior lighting 왘 Turn thumbwheel 4 until the cur- 왘 Press the switch at the ò symbol to switch the rear interior lighting on. 왘 Press the switch at the ò symbol again to switch the rear interior lighting off. 152 rent ambient lighting has reached the desired intensity. 왘 Press switch 3 to switch the headlin- er lamps on. 왘 Press switch 3 to switch the headlin- er lamps off. Electrotransparent roof lighting* In Maybach 62 with an electrotransparent roof, the roof lining can be illuminated when the screen is closed. 왘 Press switch 3 to switch the roof lighting on. 왘 Press switch 3 to switch the roof lighting off. Controls in detail Lighting Courtesy lighting For better orientation in the dark, courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows. With the automatic control activated: 앫 the inside door handles 앫 the driver’s and passenger footwells 앫 rear passengers’ footwells (only Maybach 62) With the automatic control activated and the starter switch position 1 see “Starter switch positions” (컄 page 60): 앫 the inside door handles 앫 the center console Door entry lamps For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated. Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is opened. If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes. The door entry lamps will switch off when the corresponding door is closed. i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes. i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes. 153 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see “At a glance” (컄 page 22). If you open a door or press reset button J without turning on the ignition or the light, the multifunction display is only illuminated for approximately 30 seconds. Adjusting instrument cluster illumination You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system (컄 page 172). Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. 1 Reset button J The instrument cluster is activated when you: 앫 open a door 앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 60) 앫 press reset button J 앫 switch on the exterior lamps As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/ warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination Use the knob for instrument cluster illumination 1 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster. i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps. 왘 Press the knob for instrument cluster illumination. The knob will pop out. 154 Controls in detail Instrument cluster ! Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction display (컄 page 384). To brighten illumination 왘 Turn the knob clockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will brighten. To dim illumination 왘 Turn the knob in the instrument clus- ter counterclockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will dim. Coolant temperature gauge Warning! 앫 앫 G Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248° F (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. Resetting trip odometer 왘 Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (컄 page 157). 왘 If it is not displayed, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 157). 왘 Press and hold reset button J (컄 page 154) in the instrument clus- ter until the trip odometer is reset. Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Outside temperature indicator Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The outside temperature is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver (컄 page 23) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers (컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37). 155 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving. 156 Speedometer The speed is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver (컄 page 23) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers (컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37). The segments in the speedometer of the instrument cluster show you which speed range is available to you. 앫 Cruise control operation: Segments come on from the stored speed to the maximum speed. 앫 Distronic** operation: One or two segments come on in the range for the stored speed. Clock The time is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver in the tachometer display (컄 page 23) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers (컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37). You can adjust the clock using the COMAND system. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Controls in detail Control system Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is pressed once (컄 page 61). The control system enables you to 앫 call up information about your vehicle 앫 change vehicle settings For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the multifunction display, and much more. i The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Warning! G Multifunction display A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer The control system relays information to the multifunction display. 157 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone: Press button s to take a call to dial a call to redial t to end a call to reject an incoming call 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: Press button 158 j for next display k for previous display Depending on the selected menu (컄 page 160), pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display. The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus. The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle. Controls in detail Control system It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern. 앫 If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other. 앫 If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu. In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Settings menu” (컄 page 170). The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle. The menus are described on the following pages. 159 Controls in detail Control system Menus 160 This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus. The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus. Controls in detail Control system Menus, submenus and functions Menu 1 Standard display Menu 2 Audio Menu 3 Telephone Menu 4 Navigation Menu 5 Distronic** Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Trip computer Vehicle status mes- Settings sage memory1 (컄 page 162) (컄 page 162) (컄 page 164) (컄 page 166) (컄 page 167) (컄 page 167) Commands/submenus Calling up Selecting Loading maintenance radio station phone book service display Checking tire Selecting inflation satellite rapressure dio station* Showing Calling up route guidsettings ance instructions, current direction traveled Searching for name in phone book (컄 page 169) (컄 page 170) Fuel consump- Calling up vehicle Resetting to tion statistics malfunction, warn- factory setsince start ing and system sta- tings tus messages stored in memory Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset Instrument cluster submenu Checking en- Operating gine oil level the CD player Resetting fuel consumption statistics Lighting submenu Digital speedometer Distance to empty Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu 1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored. i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in. 161 Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu In basic mode, the multifunction display shows the trip odometer and the main odometer. This is known as the standard display. The following functions are available: Function Page Calling up maintenance service display 339 Checking tire inflation pressure 321 Checking engine oil level 309 Calling up digital speedometer 162 Audio menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on. If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the multifunction display. The following functions are available: Function Calling up digital speedometer 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer In case you see another display: 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the digital speedometer appears in the multifunction display. The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display. until the standard display appears. 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly to select the functions in the standard display menu. Current vehicle speed 162 Page Selecting radio station 163 Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) 163 Operating the CD player 163 Controls in detail Control system Selecting radio station 왘 Turn on COMAND and select radio. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. Selecting satellite radio channel (USA only) The SIRIUS satellite radio is treated as a radio application. 왘 Turn on COMAND and select the cor- responding key  on the COMAND control panel. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Operating the CD player 왘 Turn on COMAND and select CD. Re- fer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned channel in the multifunction display. 1 Waveband 2 Station frequency 1 Current track 2 Indicates CD mode 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found. i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 1 Channel name or number 2 SAT mode and preset number 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found. i A subscription to satellite radio service until the desired track is selected. i You can only choose a CD using COMAND. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. provider is required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for details. For more information, refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 163 Controls in detail Control system Select MP3-CD track Telephone menu Warning! 왘 Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before making or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. 1 Current track 2 Indicates MP3-CD mode 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. You can use the functions in the PHONE menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on. Logging-on to a network 왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND. 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. i Level of information displayed will vary depending on the information contained on the MP3-CD. Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off: 앫 164 If the telephone is off, the message in the multifunction display is: PLEASE TURN PHONE ON. Controls in detail Control system 앫 앫 If the telephone is switched on: Dialing a number from the phone book The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display reads NO SERVICE. If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book. If the telephone is on: 왘 Log on to the network (컄 page 164). As soon as the telephone has found a network, READY appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly i If you press and hold button j or k for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again. If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t. 왘 Press button s. until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button j or k. The system dials the selected phone number. 앫 If you have just switched on the phone, the control system transmit the phone books of the SIM card (GSM) or the phone books of the mobile phones (GSM or CDMA). Page This can take several minutes, depending on how many entries each phone book contains. When you press button j or k during the download of the phone book the message LOADING PHBOOK! appears in the multifunction display for approximately 3 seconds. Dialing a number from the phone book 165 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Redialing 166 until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. Answering a call 166 Ending a call 166 The standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system. You may carry out the following functions: Function If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider, the name of the party you are calling (if stored in your phone book) and the duration of the call will appear in the display. 1 Name of the party you are calling 앫 If no connection is made, the control system stores each dialed number in the redial memory. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order. 165 Controls in detail Control system Redialing Answering a call The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book. When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will see the message, or if available, the caller ID (name and number): 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. Navigation menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see NAV in the multifunction display. 앫 If COMAND is switched off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the multifunction display. 앫 With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated, the direction of travel and, if available, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display. 앫 With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button s. In the multifunction display you see the first number in the redial memory. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not want to use the telephone, i The caller’s number appears only if it is transmitted. press button t. The caller’s name appears only if the number and the name are stored in the phone book. 왘 Press button s. 왘 Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. You have answered the call. In the multifunction display you see the length of the call positioned above the number. Ending a call or reject an incoming call 왘 Press button t. You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see the standby message. 166 Please refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system. Controls in detail Control system Distronic** menu Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is active or inactive. Distronic deactivated Distronic activated When Distronic is deactivated, you will see the standard display. When you activate Distronic, you will see the set speed for about 5 seconds in the Distronic display. The following display then appears: Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 223) for instructions on how to activate Distronic. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following two pictures in the multifunction display. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function 1 Distronic activated Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available: Function Page Fuel consumption statistics since start 168 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset 168 Resetting fuel consumption statistics 168 Distance to empty 168 167 Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption statistics since start 앫 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. During this period, the data from the previous journey can be incorporated as follows: 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press reset button J (컄 page 154) in until the message FROM START appears in the multifunction display. The statistics will be incorporated. i Each time you call up the trip computer, the last function used appears as the first display. a duration of 2 minutes the instrument cluster. i If you do not press reset button J, the consumption statistics will be reset to 0. Fuel consumption since last reset 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 1 2 3 4 Distance driven since start Time elapsed since start Average fuel consumption since start Average speed since start until the message SINCE RESET appears in the multifunction display. 앫 a distance of approximately 1.25 miles (2 kilometers) or 168 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the multifunction display. 왘 Press and hold reset button J (컄 page 154) in the instrument clus- ter until the value is reset to 0. Distance to empty 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message RANGE appears in the multifunction display. The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display. Incorporating statistics from the previous journey in the consumption statistics When you restart the engine, the FROM START display flashes for: Resetting fuel consumption statistics 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset Controls in detail Control system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded. The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored. Warning! G Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 364). 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display. If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear, then there are no messages stored. Vehicle status messages have been recorded 왘 Press button k or j. The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical hints” section for malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 364). i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you switch off the ignition. You will then only see high-priority messages in the multifunction display. These are highlighted in red color (컄 page 364). If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display: 1 Number of messages 169 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions: 앫 앫 The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings. A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the message SETTINGS appears in the multifunction display. Resetting all settings 170 Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE submenu. Submenus in the Settings menu 170 Submenus in the Settings menu Instrument cluster submenu 172 왘 Press button j. Lighting submenu 172 Vehicle submenu 176 Convenience submenu 177 Function Page The various submenus appear in the multifunction display. Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings. 왘 Press reset button J (컄 page 154) in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. In the display you will see the request to press reset button J again to confirm. 왘 Press reset button J again. The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings. i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing reset button J a second time. After approximately 5 seconds, the SETTINGS menu appears again. 왘 Press button æ or ç. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up with button æ. With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use button j to access the individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you can use button j to move to the next function or button k to move to the previous function within that submenu. The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç. 170 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE (컄 page 172) (컄 page 172) (컄 page 176) (컄 page 177) Selecting speedometer display Setting daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking mode mode (USA only) Selecting language Setting locator lighting Activating easy-entry/exit feature Setting station selection mode Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Setting ambient lighting Setting night security illumination Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off 171 Controls in detail Control system 왘 Press button æ or ç to set Instrument cluster submenu Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available: Function Page speedometer unit to MILES or KM. Selecting language 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Selecting speedometer display mode 172 until the message LANGUAGE appears in the multifunction display. Selecting language 172 The selection marker is on the current setting. Selecting speedometer display mode 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message DISPLAY VALUES IN appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages. Available languages: 172 앫 German 앫 English 앫 French 앫 Italian 앫 Spanish Lighting submenu Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following functions are available: Function Page Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) 173 Setting locator lighting 173 Setting ambient lighting 174 Setting night security illumination 174 Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 175 Controls in detail Control system Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally: i This function is not available in countries 앫 Parking lamps where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message LIGHTING CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select manual operation (MANUAL)or daytime running lamp mode (CONSTANT). For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting” (컄 page 144). Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U, the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**: 앫 Parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps The following message appears in the multifunction display: 앫 Exterior rear view mirror lamps LIGHTING CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING. The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. i For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings (컄 page 170) while driving will not deactivated the daytime running lamp mode. If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING 컄컄 submenu. With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch at position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. 173 Controls in detail Control system 컄컄 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message LOCATOR LIGHTING appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting ambient lighting Use this function, you can adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message AMBIENT LIGHTING appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed switch-off feature) Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed. With the headlamps delayed switch-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off: 앫 Parking lamps 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch 앫 Tail lamps the locator lighting function ON. 앫 License plate lamps 앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Front fog lamps 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle (컄 page 142). The locator lighting feature is activated. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the desired brightness of the ambient lighting. The setting LEVEL 1 represents the darkest level and setting LEVEL 5 the brightest level. The ambient light is switched off at setting OFF. If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 174 Controls in detail Control system Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- ton on the gear selector lever (컄 page 61). Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the headlamps delayed switch-off feature ON or OFF. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine (컄 page 142). The headlamps delayed switch-off feature is activated. You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed switch-off feature: 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message INTERIOR LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the interior lighting delayed switch-off feature ON or OFF. 왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. 왘 Then turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 and back to 0. The headlamps delayed switch-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 175 Controls in detail Control system Vehicle submenu Setting automatic locking Setting station selection mode Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available: Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Use the STATION SEARCH USING function to select the manual or memory station selection mode for the radio (컄 page 163). Function Page Setting automatic locking 176 Setting station selection mode 176 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the VEHICLE submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK appears in the multifunction display. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the VEHICLE submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message STATION SEARCH USING. appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select the 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF. 176 desired station selection mode. You can select: 앫 FREQUENCY 앫 MEMORY selects next stored station Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The following functions are available: Function Page Activating easy-entry/exit feature 177 Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors 177 Press seat adjustment switch (컄 page 63). 앫 Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M (컄 page 140). Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the CONVENIENCE submenu. Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature (컄 page 65). Warning! 앫 G 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE appears in the multifunction display. 앫 folded in when you lock your vehicle 앫 folded out when you unlock your vehicle 왘 Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCE submenu using button æ or ç. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS WHEN LOCKING appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following: Move steering adjustment stalk (컄 page 64). Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically The selection marker is on the current setting. You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. 앫 Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors automatic fold-in setting for the mirrors ON or OFF. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the easy-entry/exit feature ON or OFF. 177 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission see “Automatic transmission” (컄 page 70). Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions. If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program. i During the brief warm-up, the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. Warning! G Gear selector lever The gear selector lever is located on the lower part of the front center console. Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position i The current gear selector lever position P, R, N or D appears in the tachometer display (컄 page 180). 178 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning! G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting procedure The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on: 앫 the gear selector lever position D (컄 page 180) with gear ranges (컄 page 182) 앫 the selected program mode (C/S) (컄 page 183) 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal (컄 page 181) 앫 the vehicle speed ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by: 앫 limiting the gear range 앫 changing gears manually 179 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever positions The current gear selector lever position appears in the tachometer display. Effect ì Park position ë Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in park position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in park position P to secure the vehicle. 1 Current gear selector lever position The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in park position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in park position P. í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped. 180 Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage neutral position N while driving. If the ESP® is deactivated or malfunctioning: Move gear selector lever to neutral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available. ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning! G Stopping Driving tips Accelerator position Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in park position P is dangerous. Also, park position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior: 왘 Leave the transmission in gear. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P (컄 page 72). Kickdown When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake. When you stop for a longer period of time with the engine idling and/or on a hill: 왘 Set the parking brake. 왘 Move gear selector lever to park position P. resistance. Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear. 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you Warning! G have reached the desired speed. The transmission shifts up again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from park position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 181 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space: 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. 왘 Accelerate gently. 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelera- tor. Working on the vehicle Warning! Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in drive position D, you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within. You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (D+) (컄 page 184). Effect é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only. è The transmission shifts through third gear only. With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine. ç The selected gear range appears in the tachometer display. The transmission shifts through second gear only. Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving G When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. æ 앫 on steep downgrades 앫 in mountainous regions 앫 under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only. For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. 1 Current gear range 182 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. The selected program mode appears in the tachometer display. 왘 Press program mode selector switch repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the tachometer display. Select C for comfort driving: 앫 Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads. 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin. Select S for standard driving: 1 Current program mode Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving 앫 Upshifts occur earlier. ! Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of park position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted. 183 Controls in detail Automatic transmission One-touch gearshifting With the gear selector lever in drive position D, you can limit or extend the gear range. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 180). i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded. G Canceling gear range limit 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display (컄 page 180). The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever Extending gear range the right in the D+ direction. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. 184 the left in the D– direction. 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to Limiting gear range Warning! 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. in the D– direction. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be selected. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 왘 Move the gear selector lever to park position P. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. 왘 Restart the engine. 왘 Move the gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or position R. 왘 Have the transmission checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 185 Controls in detail Good visibility Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 74). Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard. i The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have 앫 switched on the headlamps and 앫 operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times When you switch off the ignition, the counter resets. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system” (컄 page 446). Rear view mirrors For information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 66). Auto-dimming rear view mirrors 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when 왘 Press button 1. 앫 the auto-dimming function is activated (컄 page 187) 앫 the ignition is switched on 1 Headlamp washer button The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet. and 앫 186 incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if 앫 reverse gear is engaged 앫 the interior lighting is turned on Warning! G The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the rear window curtain is closed. Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles (incident light) could blind you. As a result, you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident. Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. Controls in detail Good visibility ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact Deactivating with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water. Warning! Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passengerside exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. G Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position The buttons are located on the driver’s door. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button 1. The green indicator lamp in button 1 goes out. Activating 왘 Press button 1 again. The green indicator lamp in button 1 comes on. i The setting will remain stored even when 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view 컄컄 mirror you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 187 Controls in detail Good visibility 컄컄 왘 Make sure you have stored a parking Power folding exterior rear view mirrors position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror (컄 page 141). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Warning! 왘 Press button 2 for the passenger- side exterior rear view mirror. With the exterior rear view mirrors folded in when driving the vehicle, you cannot observe surrounding traffic conditions and which could result in an accident. Before driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior rear view mirrors are folded out. 왘 Place the gear selector lever in re- verse gear R. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position: 앫 10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R 앫 immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) 앫 immediately when you press the button for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 1 G Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not completely folded out. The button is located on the driver’s door. ! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may be damaged. Folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically When the corresponding function in the control system is activated (컄 page 177): 1 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out 앫 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside. The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or passenger door are subsequently opened. 왘 Briefly press button 1. The mirrors fold in. i If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in. 왘 Press button 1 again. The mirrors fold out. 188 Controls in detail Good visibility ! If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly Glare from the front pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back into place. Glare from the front and sides ! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 2 and pivot it to the side. If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirror by hand as it may damage the adjustment mechanism. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally. Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving. Warning! G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. i For information on vanity mirrors (컄 page 248). 1 Sun visor 왘 Swing sun visor 1 down. 1 Sun visor 2 Mounting 3 Additional sun visor 왘 Swing sun visor 1 down. 왘 Disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 2. 왘 Pivot sun visor to the side. The sun visors are extendable. 왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or pulling in direction of the arrows. 왘 Swing additional sun visor 3 down. 189 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster consumes high levels of energy. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The heating time varies depending on outside temperature and driving conditions, ranging from approximately 6 minutes at temperatures above 43°F (6°C) to over 20 minutes at temperatures below -14°F (-26°C) and at high speed. Activating 왘 Press button F (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Deactivating 왘 Press button F again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i If the indicator lamp F is flashing, G there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The rear window defroster switches off automatically. Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others. The rear window defroster will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Warning! 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 190 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control The automatic climate control is a 4-zone intelligent climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into four zones. With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone. Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control (컄 page 193) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. i Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. The activated charcoal filter, when switched on, markedly reduces odors and removes pollutants from the air entering the passenger compartment. Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the air conditioning mode is deactivated (컄 page 200). i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 211). The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks and any other debris. Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. 191 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Cockpit 1 Left side air vent, adjustable 5 Right side air vent, adjustable 8 Automatic climate control panel 2 Left center air vent, adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent 9 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent a Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent 3 Fixed air vent 4 Right center air vent, adjustable 192 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control panel, front 1 Air distribution and air volume, driver’s side (automatic) 8 Air distribution, passenger side (manual) 2 Air distribution, driver’s side (manual) 9 Air distribution and air volume, passenger side (automatic) 3 Air volume, driver’s side a Rear window defroster 4 Temperature control, driver’s side b Rear air-conditioning remote control 5 Display 6 Temperature control, passenger side d AC cooling on/off e Residual heat and ventilation f Activated charcoal filter g Air recirculation h Front defroster c Automatic climate control on/off button 7 Air volume, passenger side 193 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating the climate control system It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system. Deactivating 왘 Press button M (컄 page 193). Warning! G When the automatic climate control is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off, if necessary. Warning! G If you switch off the cooling function the windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Activating 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press one button U (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. 왘 Use temperature controls 4 for the left side or 6 (컄 page 193) for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically. Deactivating 왘 Press one button U (컄 page 193). Reactivating i You can switch the automatic climate 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). control system on and off for each side of the passenger compartment as desired. 왘 Press button M or U (컄 page 193). 194 The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 4 for the driver’s side or 6 (컄 page 193) for the passenger side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 2 and 8 (컄 page 193) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are located on the controls: Ô Directs air to the windows Increasing Ø Directs air to the windows, footwells, center and side air vents Ó Directs air to the footwell air vents Õ Directs air to the center and side air vents Symbol Function 왘 Push top of temperature control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. Decreasing 왘 Push bottom of temperature 왘 Press air distribution control 2 for control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. the driver’s side and/or 8 for the passenger side (컄 page 193). The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. Adjusting air volume Seven blower speeds are available. 왘 Press
to decrease or Q to in- crease air volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. The selected blower speed is shown in the display 5 (컄 page 193). Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also defog the windshield and the side windows. i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again. Activating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. 컄컄 The selected air distribution is shown in the display 5 (컄 page 193). 195 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 컄컄 The automatic climate control switches automatically to the following functions: 앫 maximum blowing and heating power (depends on cooling temperature) 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows 앫 cooling on to dehumidify 앫 the air recirculation mode is switched off Deactivating 왘 Press button P (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off. Windshield fogged on the outside 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on. 왘 Press one button U. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. i In automatic mode, the automatic climate control is regulated to prevent the windows from fogging up. 196 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the air volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display AUTO MAXCOOL appears. This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed). i These settings should only be selected for a short time. Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. Warning! G Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (컄 page 208) is activated, or press button P. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating Deactivating 왘 Press button , (컄 page 193). 왘 Press button , (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically: i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: 앫 at high outside temperatures 앫 앫 if the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide (NOX) in the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C) 앫 if you press button r Please note that the charcoal filter must be activated (컄 page 193) for the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically. If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 193) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically. At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. Air recirculation mode with convenience closing or opening feature Warning! G Never operate the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding button ,. 197 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Convenience closing i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only 왘 Press and hold button , for ap- return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button ,. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current position if button , is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/sliding sunroof. proximately 2 seconds. The side windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can release button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air recirculation mode is activated. Convenience opening 왘 Press and hold button , for ap- proximately 2 seconds. The side windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position. You can release button , once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated. 198 Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compartment. Activating 왘 Press button e (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Deactivating 왘 Press button e (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel. The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if air conditioning is deactivated (컄 page 200) or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F (5°C). Controls in detail Automatic climate control The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down. Charcoal filter with convenience closing or opening feature Warning! G Never operate the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding button e. Convenience closing i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only 왘 Press and hold button e for ap- return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button ,. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current position if button , is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/sliding sunroof. proximately 2 seconds. The side windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can release button e once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The charcoal filter is activated. Convenience opening 왘 Press and hold button e for ap- proximately 2 seconds. The side windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position. You can release button e once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The charcoal filter is deactivated. 199 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. 왘 Press button r (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button r comes on. 200 Activating Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. 왘 Press button r again (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on the button r goes out. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. ! If the indicator lamp on the button r does not go out or starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Activating 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch. 왘 Press button T (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. Deactivating 왘 Press button T (컄 page 193). The indicator lamp on button T goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off: 앫 when the ignition is switched on 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 if the battery voltage drops i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Temperature-controlled glove box The glove box can be heated or cooled. The air temperature is regulated according to the outside temperature and the temperature set in the front air-conditioning control panel on the right. The adjustable vent is in the glove box. 왘 Turn adjustable vent 1 clockwise. The glove box will be heated or cooled. 왘 Turn adjustable vent 1 counterclock- wise. Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control panel 왘 Press button ™ (컄 page 193) on the front control panel. The display switches over to show the rear passenger compartment settings. At the same time, the indicator lamps in the air distribution buttons come on according to the air distribution set for the rear compartment. The glove box will neither be heated nor cooled. i If you are transporting perishable goods (e.g. groceries) in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. You can adjust all settings for the rear passenger compartment at the cockpit control panel. Standard display 1 Adjustable vent Approximately 5 seconds after the last button was pressed, the current display disappears and the standard display is called back up. or 왘 Press button ™ again. 201 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Rear passenger compartment Overview of Maybach 57 202 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 2 Upper left air vent 3 Upper right air vent 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent 6 Lower right air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent a Automatic climate control panel b Thumbwheel for center air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. 203 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Overview of Maybach 62 204 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 2 Upper left air vent 3 Upper right air vent 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent 6 Lower right air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent a Automatic climate control panel b Thumbwheel for center air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. 205 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating the climate control system Activating 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button M or U. Deactivating It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system. Automatic climate control panel, rear 1 Air volume, left (manual) 2 Temperature control, left 3 Display 4 Temperature control, right 5 Air volume, right (manual) 6 Air distribution, right (automatic) 7 Air distribution, right (manual) 8 AC cooling on/off 9 Residual heat and ventilation/ Automatic climate control on/off button a Air distribution, left (manual) b Air distribution, left (automatic) 206 왘 Press button M. ! The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off, if necessary. i The automatic climate control system can also be switched on and off separately on each side of the passenger compartment, as required. Activating 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press one button U. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. 왘 Use temperature controls 2 for the left side or 4 for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically. Deactivating 왘 Press one button U. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off. Controls in detail Automatic climate control 왘 Press the desired air distribution control 7 and/or a (컄 page 206). Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 for the left side or 4 for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 7 and a (컄 page 206) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are located on the controls: i When operating the climate control sys- Ü Directs air to roof vents or upper side, center and lower side vents Û Directs air to roof vents or upper side, footwell, center and lower side vents Ú Directs air to footwell, center and lower side vents a Directs air to center and lower side vents The indicator lamp on button U (컄 page 206) goes out. Y Directs air to the footwell air vents The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. tem in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. Increasing 왘 Push top of temperature control 2 and/or 4 (컄 page 206) until the dis- Symbol Function play shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. Decreasing 왘 Push bottom of temperature control 2 and/or 4 (컄 page 206) un- The indicator lamp on button U (컄 page 206) goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. The selected air distribution is shown in the display 3 (컄 page 206). Adjusting air volume Seven blower speeds are available. 왘 Press
to decrease or Q (컄 page 206) to increase air volume to the desired level. The selected blower speed is shown in the display 3 (컄 page 206). til the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. 207 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. 왘 Press button r (컄 page 206). The indicator lamp on the button r comes on. 208 Activating Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning. 왘 Press button r again (컄 page 206). 왘 Press button T (컄 page 206). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. Deactivating 왘 Press button T (컄 page 206). The indicator lamp on button T goes out. The indicator lamp on the button r goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off: The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. 앫 when the ignition is switched on i If button r on the automatic climate 앫 after about 30 minutes 앫 if the battery voltage drops control panel starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Activating 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch. i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Solar panel* The solar cells convert natural light into electrical energy. When the engine is switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation fan. The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the sunlight. The air flow depends on the intensity of the solar radiation. The ventilation starts 2 minutes after switching off the engine. Controls in detail Power windows Power windows Warning! Opening and closing the power windows The windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all of the windows are on the driver’s door. The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors. G When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly. Power window switches on the driver’s door 1 2 3 4 5 Left front door window Right front door window Right rear door window Left rear door window Rear door windows override switch (컄 page 100) When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) on an outside door handle, or by pressing and holding button , or button e on the climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate. i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 211). Depending on current position, the windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held for 2 seconds. i Operating the windows from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 100). i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the windows can be operated 앫 until you open the driver’s or passenger door 앫 for at least 5 minutes i Vehicles with rear door window curtains* (컄 page 269): When opening a rear door window with the rear door window curtain not completely opened, the curtain will open first. 209 Controls in detail Power windows 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Opening the windows Fully opening the windows (Express-open) 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol k to resistance point. symbol k past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window opens completely. Closing the windows Fully closing the windows (Express-close) 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j to resistance point. The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch. Warning! 왘 Briefly press the respective power window switch again. Synchronizing the power windows The windows must be synchronized 앫 The corresponding window closes completely. after the consumer battery has been disconnected 앫 if the windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close) Warning! G Each window must be synchronized. Driver’s door only: If within 5 seconds you again press the switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). ! If the upward movement of the window 왘 Keep pressing the switches for ap- is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window switch at the symbol j again past the resistance point and release. 210 Stopping the power windows during Express-operation symbol j past the point of resistance and release. G If you press and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective power window switch at the symbol j. The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function. 왘 Press and hold the power window switches at the symbol j until the windows are completely closed. proximately 1 second. The windows are synchronized. Controls in detail Power windows Summer opening feature If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously 앫 opening the windows 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof 앫 turning on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature. 왘 Press and hold button Œ until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the desired position. 왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro- cedure. Convenience closing feature When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously. Warning! When closing the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: 앫 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the driver’s outside door handle (컄 page 211). The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle. 왘 Release button ‹ to interrupt pro- cedure. 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the driver’s outside door handle. The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button ‹. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: 앫 Release the lock button on the outside door handle (컄 page 80) to stop the closing procedure. 앫 Pull on the outside door handle and hold firmly. The windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof will open for as long as the outside door handle is held but the door not opened. 왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed. G 왘 Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle (컄 page 80) until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed. 왘 Release the lock button on the out- side door handle to interrupt procedure. 211 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Power tilt/sliding sunroof The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/ sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 5 Screen With the sunroof closed or tilted open, screen 5 can be slid into the roof opening to help provide shade. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract. Sunroof switch 1 2 3 4 Push back to slide sunroof open Push forward to slide sunroof closed Pull down to lower sunroof at rear Push up to raise sunroof at rear 212 Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 403). Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof ! Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be damaged which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate these noises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 211). Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held for 2 seconds. i With the SmartKey in starter switch posi- Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the switch to the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4. 왘 Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the switch past the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof tion 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated 왘 Move the switch in any direction. 앫 until you open the driver’s or passenger door is blocked during the closing procedure, the sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. 앫 for up to approximately 5 minutes 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized 앫 after the consumer battery has been disconnected 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually 앫 a malfunction 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly 왘 Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box (컄 page 426). 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 until the tilt/ sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear. 왘 Keep holding the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 for approximately 1 second. 왘 Check the Express-open feature. If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 213 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. You can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 214 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction “open”. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 403). i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 211). Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held for two seconds. i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated 앫 until you open the driver’s or passenger door 앫 for up to approximately 5 minutes 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Operating from the cockpit Opening and closing the screen The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. 왘 To open or close the screen, move the sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrow 1 or 2. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. 왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ Sunroof switch, front 1 Push back to slide screen or sunroof open 2 Push forward to slide screen or sunroof closed 3 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear 4 Push up to raise sunroof at rear sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4. 왘 Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. 왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation 왘 Move the switch in any direction. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. i If the screen is closed, the screen opens first when you push the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1. Push the sunroof switch again in direction of arrow 1 to open the tilt/sliding sunroof. The screen only operates with the tilt/sliding sunroof closed. 215 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Operating from the rear passenger compartment The switches are in the storage compartment in the rear center armrest. Opening and closing the screen 왘 To open or close the screen, press sunroof switch 4 at 3 or 2. The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen 왘 To open or close the screen, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. 왘 The screen opens or closes completeSunroof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*) Sunroof switches, rear 1 2 3 4 Press to lower sunroof at rear Press to slide screen or sunroof closed Press to slide screen or sunroof open Switch for screen and sliding portion of roof 5 Press to raise sunroof at rear 6 Switch for tilt portion of roof 1 2 3 4 Press to lower sunroof at rear Press to slide screen or sunroof closed Press to slide screen or sunroof open Switch for screen and sliding portion of roof 5 Press to raise sunroof at rear 6 Switch for tilt portion of roof i If the screen is closed, the screen will open first when you press sunroof switch 4 at 3. Press sunroof switch 4 again at 3 to open the tilt/sliding sunroof. The screen only operates with the tilt/sliding sunroof closed. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 216 ly. Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. 왘 Release sunroof switch 4 when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. Fully raising and lowering the power tilt/ sliding sunroof 왘 Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box (컄 page 426). 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse 왘 To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 6 past the resistance point at 1 or 5 and release. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the switch again. The rear tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. 왘 Press sunroof switch 4 again. Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof 앫 is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. after the consumer battery has been disconnected 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof has been operated manually 앫 a malfunction 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof 왘 Open the screen if it is closed. box. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 If the tilt/sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, lower and close it. 왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 215) or press sunroof switch 6 at 5 (컄 page 216) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear. 왘 Keep pressing the respective switch for approximately 1 second. 왘 Check the Express-open feature (컄 page 215). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 왘 To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 6 to the resistance point at 1 or 5. 왘 Release sunroof switch 6 when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. 217 Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Electrotransparent roof* When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Operating the electrotransparent roof You can operate the electrotransparent roof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction “open”. The electrotransparent roof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. 218 Operating from the cockpit The switch for the electrotransparent roof is on the overhead control unit. i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the electrotransparent roof can be operated 앫 until you open the driver’s or passenger door 앫 for up to approximately 5 minutes. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Electrotransparent roof switches, front 1 Push back to slide screen closed 2 Push forward to slide screen open 3 Pull down to make the electrotransparent roof opaque/switch off roof lighting 4 Push up to make the electrotransparent roof transparent/switch on roof lighting Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Opening the screen 왘 Slide the switch to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2. 왘 Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Stopping the screen during Express-operation Operating from the rear passenger compartment 왘 Move the switch in any direction. The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest. Making the electrotransparent roof transparent Closing the screen The screen must be completely open. 왘 Move the switch to the resistance 왘 Push the switch in direction of point in direction of arrow 1. 왘 Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. arrow 4. Making the electrotransparent roof opaque Fully opening the screen (Express-open) The screen must be completely open. 왘 Move the switch past the resistance 왘 Pull the switch in direction of point in direction of arrow 2 and release. The screen opens completely. Fully closing the screen (Express-close) 왘 Move the switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 and release. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque and the screen closes completely. arrow 3. Switching on roof lighting Electrotransparent roof switches, rear The screen must be completely closed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 왘 Press the switch in direction of arrow 4. Switching off roof lighting 왘 Pull the switch in direction of Press to make roof opaque Press to slide screen closed Press to slide screen open Switch for screen Press to make roof transparent Switch for electrotransparent roof arrow 3. 219 Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Opening and closing the screen 왘 To open or close the screen, press switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Electrotransparent roof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to make roof opaque Press to slide screen closed Press to slide screen open Switch for screen Press to make roof transparent Switch for electrotransparent roof 220 Making the electrotransparent roof transparent 왘 Press switch 6 at 5. The screen opens automatically and the electrotransparent roof turns transparent. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen Making the electrotransparent roof opaque 왘 To open or close the screen, press 왘 If the screen is closed, open it com- switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. The screen opens or closes completely. Stopping the screen during Express-operation 왘 Press switch 4 again. pletely. 왘 Press switch 6 at 1. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque. Controls in detail Driving systems Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages: 앫 Cruise control and Distronic**, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed. 앫 Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and controls the vehicle level. 앫 Vehicle level control, with which you can change the vehicle level. 앫 Parktronic and Parking Assist System (PAS), which serves as a parking assistant. For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake, see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 103). Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle. Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h). Warning! G Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation. Cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column. Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. 앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. 앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Cancels cruise control Resume at last set speed The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever. 221 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting current speed 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the de- sired speed. 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. The current speed is set. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. Cruise control is activated. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control: 왘 Step on the brake pedal. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. or 222 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. ! Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving, except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine. Setting a higher speed 왘 Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 221) and hold it until the desired speed is reached. 왘 Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control resumes the last speed set. Setting a lower speed 왘 Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 221) and hold it until the desired speed is reached. 왘 Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 221). Slower 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 221). Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 221). The cruise control resumes the last set speed. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. Distronic** When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases driving convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and other major roads. 앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at a preset distance. 앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, Distronic will function in the same way as cruise control (컄 page 221). Warning! G Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to stationary objects, nor does it recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power. Warning! G Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver. Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Warning! G Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to be attentive to road, traffic and weather conditions and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control of the vehicle. 223 Controls in detail Driving systems i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Warning! Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. Warning! G Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet. Warning! G Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it on if: 앫 224 G roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid 앫 the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The distance control could be impaired Always pay attention to traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late and could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others. Warning! G Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles. Switch off Distronic: 앫 when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane 앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp Controls in detail Driving systems 앫 in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it. Warning! If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed. i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system. 왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid a collision. Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the following warning note. The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again established. G The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. Distronic displays in the speedometer dial Segments If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead, the segments from the speed of the vehicle ahead to the set speed come on. If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision 앫 the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on red 앫 an intermittent warning sounds Set speed 225 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Warning! G An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. If Distronic is deactivated, you can see the standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display. Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in the brake pedal moving. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. Distronic menu in the control system In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following displays. 226 Distronic deactivated 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic activated Cruise control lever Activating Distronic If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds. If Distronic is activated, you then see the following display in the multifunction display. The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever. You can activate Distronic when The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column. 앫 you are driving above 25 mph (40 km/h) 앫 the ESP® is activated (컄 page 107) i The maximum speed you can set is 110 mph (180 km/h). If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message --- in the multifunction display. In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic: 1 Distronic activated 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Deactivates Distronic Resumes at last set speed 앫 up to 2 minutes after starting the engine 앫 when you brake 앫 if you have set the parking brake 앫 if the gear selector lever is in position P, R or N 앫 if the ESP® is switched off 227 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed Setting a lower speed 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the de- 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 227) to 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 227) to sired speed. 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. Distronic is activated and the current speed is set. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display: DISTRONIC OVERRIDE Distronic will not work to maintain the distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. increase vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). decrease vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). The new speed is set. The new speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer (컄 page 225). The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer (컄 page 225). i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control resumes the last speed set. i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support deceleration. In addition, the transmission will automatically downshift on long downhill grades. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 227). 228 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! Deactivating Distronic G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 227). Distronic is set to the last stored speed. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system: 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 227). or 왘 Step on the brake pedal. Distronic is deactivated. The last speed set is stored into memory. i The following message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds: DISTRONIC OFF The last stored speed is deleted when you turn off the engine. Distronic deactivates automatically when: 앫 You set the parking brake. 앫 You drive slower than 22 mph (35 km/h). 앫 The ESP® is active (컄 page 107) or you deactivate the ESP®. 앫 You move the transmission gear selector lever into position N. A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF message appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds. Warning! G Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Setting the following distance in Distronic You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display. Warning! G It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. 229 Controls in detail Driving systems The distance warning function on/off button and thumbwheel for setting distance are located on the lower part of the front center console. Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead. 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of arrow 5. Distance warning function When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists: 1 Distance warning function on/off button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Thumbwheel for setting distance 4 Increasing distance 5 Decreasing distance Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead. 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of arrow 4. 230 Warning! G If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always enable you to avoid a collision. 앫 The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on. 앫 An intermittent warning sounds. i Complex driving situations are not always If these warnings are issued, you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead. fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp l also extinguishes. Activating 왘 Press button 1 {. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 227). Controls in detail Driving systems Deactivating 왘 Press button 1 {. The indicator lamp 2 on the button goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display. Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.: 앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam 앫 a disabled vehicle Driving with Distronic 앫 an oncoming vehicle This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will deactivate the Distronic system. The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by steering or braking the vehicle. Warning! G Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that: Warning! G For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system sensor” (컄 page 346). i If the message: DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL disappears during driving and last speed stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is again operational. Turns and bends Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes. 앫 The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message: While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed. DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. appears in the multifunction display. 231 Controls in detail Driving systems Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead. 232 Controls in detail Driving systems Airmatic DC (Dual Control) Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of three components: 앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) 앫 Stiffness of spring 앫 Vehicle level control The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular. Damping and suspension are adjusted automatically according to your driving style and road conditions. In addition to the automatic mode designed for your convenience, you can adjust the suspension tuning yourself by selecting from two other levels using the button on the center console. Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to: 앫 Your driving style 앫 Road surface conditions 앫 Your choice of suspension style, “Comfort”, “Sporty 1” or “Sporty 2”, which you select using the damping button. 1 Damping button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Indicator lamp 컄컄 233 Controls in detail Driving systems 컄컄 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 60). 왘 Press damping button 1 until the de- sired suspension style is set. 앫 If both indicator lamps are out, you have chosen the automatic mode for soft damping. The message: AIRMATIC DC CONVENIENCE for Comfort suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. 앫 If one indicator lamp is on, the control system supports a primarily dynamic style of driving. The message: AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 1 for Sporty 1 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. 234 앫 If both indicator lamps are on, the system is set for a dynamic style of driving. The message: AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 2 for Sporty 2 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. i The selected suspension style is stored in memory, even after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. Vehicle level control Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to 앫 increase vehicle safety 앫 reduce fuel consumption Warning! G To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Controls in detail Driving systems The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary (Maybach 57, Maybach 62): Vehicle level Indicator lamp Use for when stationary Ride height increase over Automatic lowering normal (depending on vehicle speed) Normal Lamp off For driving on normal roads. None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Raised Lamp on For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) The normal level of the Maybach 57 S is 0.6 in (15 mm) lower than for other models. The data given in the following table is based on the normal vehicle level of the Maybach 57 S: Vehicle level Indicator lamp Use for when stationary Ride height increase over Automatic lowering normal (depending on vehicle speed) Normal Lamp off For driving on normal roads. None None Raised Lamp on For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 1.8 in (45 mm) Max. approx. 1.8 in (45 mm) The button is located on the lower part of the front center console. 235 Controls in detail Driving systems 왘 Press button 1 again to lower the vehicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off. The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted except when you 앫 1 Vehicle level control button 2 Indicator lamp 왘 Start the engine. 왘 Briefly press button 1 to change from one level setting to the other. The message: AIRMATIC VEHICLE RISING appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display when changing from normal level to raised level. The indicator lamp 2 is then on. 236 앫 Normal level (Maybach 57, Maybach 62): At a speed exceeding approximately 68 mph (110 km/h), the ride height is reduced automatically (컄 page 235). 앫 Raised level: At a speed exceeding approximately 75 mph (120 km/h), the ride height is reduced automatically (컄 page 235). 앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to the normal level. exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h) or 앫 The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed: maintain a speed of between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more than 5 minutes The vehicle then lowers to normal level. The indicator lamp 2 goes out. i These height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change. Select the raised level only when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise 앫 handling may be impaired 앫 fuel consumption may increase Controls in detail Driving systems Parktronic system (Parking assist) Warning! G Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver. Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. The operational function of the Parktronic can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors” (컄 page 346). The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, and placed the gear selector lever in position D, R, or N. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on again. The Parktronic system also deactivates when you place the gear selector lever in position P or depress the parking brake pedal. The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. 1 Sensors in the front bumper Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration. Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. 237 Controls in detail Driving systems Range of the sensors Front sensors To function properly, the sensors must be free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors” (컄 page 346). Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Rear sensors Warning indicators Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) ! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result. Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system. Minimum distance 238 If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the warning lamps come on and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated by the system. Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear roof lining (컄 pages 38-44). Maybach 62 with partition* You have an additional warning indicator for the rear area in the roof lining, in front of the partition. In order for you to see this warning indicator, the interior rear view mirror tilts slightly upward if: 앫 the partition and curtain are not completely open 앫 the gear selector lever is in position R Controls in detail Driving systems In case you still cannot see the warning indicator after lifting up the rear view mirror: Each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle. 왘 Adjust the interior rear view mirror The Parktronic system is ready when the green readiness indicators 3 are illuminated. by hand until you can see the warning indicator. The interior rear view mirror returns to its original position as soon as: 앫 the gear selector lever is no longer in position R 앫 you exceed a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) Warning indicators activated As your vehicle approaches an object, one or more segments will come on, depending on the distance between your vehicle and the object. When the second red segment comes on, you have reached the minimum distance. 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P or the parking brake is activated. 앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D, P, or the parking brake is activated. The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be activated. Gear selector Warning indicator lever position D Front area activated R or N Rear and front area activated P Neither activated 1 Left front area warning indicator 2 Right front area warning indicator 3 Readiness indicators 239 Controls in detail Driving systems Switching the Parktronic system on/off Parktronic malfunction The Parktronic system can be switched off manually. If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds, there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on. The Parktronic button is located on the lower part of the front center console. Parking Assist System (PAS) 왘 Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 1 Parktronic on/off 2 Indicator lamp Switching off the Parktronic system 왘 Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator go out and no warning sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system will switch itself off after 20 seconds. 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Clean Parktronic system sensors (컄 page 346). 왘 Switch on the ignition. Switching on the Parktronic system or 왘 Press button 1 again. 왘 Check Parktronic operation at anoth- Indicator lamp 2 goes out. i The Parktronic system is automatically switched on when the ignition is switched on (컄 page 60). 240 er location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic signals. 1 COMAND display 2 To switch COMAND on/off 3 To switch between parallel parking/ reverse parking Controls in detail Driving systems The Parking Assist System (PAS) is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area behind the vehicle on the COMAND display 1. View through the camera In addition, the PAS contains guide lines to help you with reverse parking (back-in parking) and parallel parking. The 20 in (50 cm) 1, 40 in (100 cm) 2 and 107 in (270 cm) 3 guide lines correspond to the respective distance on the ground to the rear end of the vehicle. Warning! The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a reverse-mirror image similar to the view in a rear view mirror. Please note that objects which do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck, may appear to be further away than they actually are. In this case, you should not use the guide lines to judge distance. The use of the guide lines to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects. The camera is in the license plate recess next to the handle for the trunk lid. Warning! 1 Camera For cleaning and care of the camera lens, see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” (컄 page 347). G 1 2 3 4 20 in (50 cm) guide line 40 in (100 cm) guide line 107 in (270 cm) guide line Guide line for vehicle width G The PAS is a supplement system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other driving maneuvers always rests with the driver. The PAS may show obstacles with a distort컄컄 ed perspective, incorrectly or not at all. 241 Controls in detail Driving systems 컄컄 Special attention must be paid to objects outside of the camera’s field of view such as those located very close to or below the rear bumper, or above the recessed grip of the trunk lid. Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. The PAS does not warn you about impending collisions with objects. The driver is always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings while parking or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not only to the area behind the vehicle, but also to the area in front of and to the sides of the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or other property. We also recommend that the driver use the Parktronic system when parking or maneuvering the vehicle. Warning! G PAS may not function if: 앫 the trunk lid is not completely closed 앫 it is raining or snowing heavily, or if there is thick fog 앫 in a very dark area 앫 the camera is exposed to very strong white light (white stripes may appear on the COMAND display) 앫 the surrounding area is lit with fluorescent light (the COMAND display can flicker) 앫 there is a sudden change in temperature, for example when you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in winter (lens condensation) 앫 outside temperatures are very high (lens condensation) G 앫 the camera lens is dirty or covered see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” (컄 page 347) Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. 앫 Warning! 242 the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the position and setting of the camera checked by a qualified technician. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not use the PAS if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with snow. The vehicle could slip causing the actual vehicle position to deviate from the one shown on the COMAND display. This may cause injury to you or others, or damage the vehicle or objects. Mounting tires/rims of other specification than the original equipment tires/rims may impair the function of the PAS. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Use of PAS can be dangerous if you are color-blind or have impaired color vision. Only use PAS if you can see and distinguish all colored guide lines shown by PAS on the COMAND display. Switching on PAS 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Switch on the COMAND (please refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions). Controls in detail Driving systems 왘 Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). The COMAND display will show the area behind the vehicle with guide lines to help you reverse into a parking place. i If you activate a different function on the driver’s COMAND controls while reverse parking or parallel parking, the image from the back-up camera is interrupted. To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out of reverse gear and then re-engage reverse gear again. Reverse parking (back-in parking) This function helps you when you are reversing in a straight line or backing in at any angle. The guide line for vehicle width 4 shows the width necessary for the vehicle. Warning! G Please note that objects which do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck, may appear to be further away than they actually are. In this case, you should not use the guide lines to judge distance as the use of the guide lines to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects. Even when the object you approach is directly on the ground (and nothing on the object extends above the ground beyond the object’s contours directly touching the ground) and no objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck are in the path, do not approach the object on the ground any closer than red guide line 2. 1 2 3 4 First yellow guide line Red guide line Second yellow guide line Guide line for vehicle width 1 Guide line for straight driving 2 Guide line for cornering The guide line for straight driving 1 shows you the space necessary for your vehicle. When you turn the steering wheel, the room required by the vehicle for reversing with the corresponding wheel angle is shown with yellow guide lines 2. Backing in straight 왘 Switch on the COMAND. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). You will see the guide line for reverse 컄컄 parking on the COMAND display. 243 Controls in detail Driving systems 컄컄 왘 Back in straight carefully. The desired parking space is wide enough if nothing protrudes into or is within the guide lines. Backing in at any angle 왘 Switch on the COMAND. Parallel parking 왘 Press parallel parking button 1 on This function assists you when you wish to park in a row, e.g. in a parking place parallel to the road. i If you press the parallel parking/back-in 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location 앫 at a distance of approximately 3 feet (1 meter) parallel to the vehicle that is in front of the desired parking space. 앫 in such a way that the front of the parked vehicle is parallel to your rear wheel. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). You will see the guide line for reverse parking on the COMAND display. 왘 Turn steering wheel so that the guide lines for cornering are pointing towards the desired parking space. The parking space is wide enough if nothing protrudes into the guide lines. parking selector button 1 again, you have selected the reverse parking assistance function once more (컄 page 243). 왘 Switch on the COMAND. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). 2 Vertical guide line 왘 Back in carefully. 왘 Back up carefully parallel to parked car until the respective vertical guide line 2 is at the end of the parked vehicle next to you. 왘 When the green guide line for straight driving lies parallel inside the desired parking space, straighten the steering wheel for straight driving. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 왘 Back in enough to leave sufficient free space around the vehicle. 1 Parallel parking/back-in parking selector button 244 front center console. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G If the respective vertical guide line 2 is not yet located at the end of the parked vehicle and you are already turning into the parking space, you could collide with the parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure immediately. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again. 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn steering wheel in direction of parking until extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of the vehicle parked next to you 3. or 왘 If there is no vehicle next to you to use as a reference, turn steering wheel until exterior boundary line 6 intersects the curb or some other marking with which you would like to parallel park. i If there is an obstacle within vehicle contour guide lines 5 (e.g. part of the vehicle parked behind you or a part of the curb), the parking space is too small for your vehicle. 3 4 5 6 Tire reference point Extension guide line Vehicle contour guide lines Exterior boundary line i If you turn the steering wheel too far, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS not possible. Steering wheel turned too far. Please turn back. Turn the steering wheel back until the COMAND display clears and extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of the vehicle parked next to you 3. If you back up using the wrong wheel angle, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again. 7 Bent guide line 왘 Back up with the set wheel angle. The guide lines in the COMAND display disappear. After a short distance, bent guide line 7 appears. i If you turn the steering wheel while backing up, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible. The calculated course is no longer being followed. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again. 왘 Back up until bent guide line 7 inter- sects the edge of the parking space, e.g. the curb. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 컄컄 245 Controls in detail Driving systems 왘 Back up using the set wheel angle un- til guide line 8 for straight driving is parallel to the edge of the parking space, e.g. the curb. 왘 Now straighten out steering wheel and back up until you still have just enough room behind the vehicle. While doing so, observe the Parktronic warning indicators (컄 page 238). 컄컄 8 Guide line for straight driving 9 Guide line for cornering 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn steering wheel as far as it will go in the opposite direction. The guide lines for straight driving 8 and cornering 9 appear in the COMAND display. 246 Controls in detail Loading Loading Cargo tie-down hooks Six hooks are located in the trunk. Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo. Loading instructions The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Warning! G Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf. Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. 247 Controls in detail Useful features 왘 To use mirror, lift up cover 2. Useful features Vanity mirror lamp 1 comes on. Vanity mirrors 왘 Press chrome label 4. i If you disengage the sun visor from Vanity mirror in the sun visor Warning! Opening the vanity mirror Vanity mirror 3 folds down and the vanity mirror lamp comes on. mounting, vanity mirror lamp 1 will switch off. G Adjusting the vanity mirror 왘 Slide the mirror to the left or to the Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. right. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the position of the mirror. ! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage the sun visor from the mounting and pivot it to the side (컄 page 189). Closing the vanity mirror 왘 Push vanity mirror 3 up until it en- gages in place. Storage compartments Warning! G Vanity mirror in the rear To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during 1 Vanity mirror lamp 2 Mirror cover 248 앫 braking Example illustration from Maybach 57 앫 vehicle maneuvers or 3 Vanity mirror 4 Chrome label 앫 an accident. Controls in detail Useful features Glove box i The glove box can be heated or cooled. The glove box can get very warm due to its confined space (컄 page 201). When storing heat-sensitive objects in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. i An AUX socket is located in the glove box. Portable audio devices can be plugged in here. Opening 왘 Press button 1. The glove box lid 2 swings down. Locking the glove box separately You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for service. 왘 Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey (컄 page 401). 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the glove box lock and turn it to locked position 4. i The separate locking status of the glove box can only be canceled by means of the mechanical key. 1 Glove box lid release Closing Unlocking the glove box separately 2 Glove box lid 왘 Push lid 2 up to close. 왘 Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey (컄 page 401). 3 Unlocked position 4 Locked position 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the glove box lock and turn it to unlocked position 3. You can now open the glove box. 249 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment in the glove box Storage compartments in the front doors A storage compartment for pens, a flashlight and a coin holder is located in the cover of the glove box. Warning! G Opening Always keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. 왘 Lightly touch cover plate. The cover opens automatically. Closing 왘 Lightly push the cover plate up until it engages in lock. Compartment for the front telephone Warning! G Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while driving. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during 앫 braking 앫 vehicle maneuvers or 앫 an accident. 1 Compartment lid release button 2 Compartment for telephone Opening 왘 Press release button 1. The compartment lid opens downward. The telephone handset swings out. Closing 왘 Press button 1 to close. ! To prevent any damage, the telephone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. i The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ (컄 page 285) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. 250 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button 3 Storage compartment with storage space for change and CDs Controls in detail Useful features Opening the storage compartment Opening the storage compartment Opening the storage compartment 왘 Lift the lid 1 up. 왘 Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. 왘 Press button 3. Closing the storage compartment Closing the storage compartment 왘 Storage compartment 4 opens. 왘 Press the lid 1 down. 왘 Press the lid 1 or 2 down. Closing the storage compartment Opening the storage compartment Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 62) 왘 Press button 2. 왘 Push the cover plate 4 up until it en- gages in the lock. Storage compartment under the driver’s seat The storage compartment 3 opens. Closing the storage compartment 왘 Push the cover plate 3 up until it en- gages in the lock. Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 57) 1 2 3 4 1 Headphones storage compartment 2 Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*) Headphones storage compartment Storage compartment Opening button Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*) 1 Tabs Opening the storage compartment Opening the storage compartment 왘 Press tabs 1 together. 왘 Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. 왘 Fold the cover forward. Closing the storage compartment Closing the storage compartment 왘 Press the lid 1 or 2 down. 왘 Close the cover until both tabs 1 of lock engage. 251 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment and storage compartment/drawer between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) Opening storage compartment/drawer 왘 Press button 4 briefly. The storage compartment/drawer 3 opens. Closing storage compartment/drawer 왘 Push storage compartment/ drawer 3 until it engages in the lock. Storage compartments in rear center console Opening/closing the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button for storage compartment 3 Storage compartment/drawer 4 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer 252 왘 To open, press button 1. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens. 왘 To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. Maybach 62: 왘 To open, press button 1. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens slightly. The storage compartment 1 opens upward. ward until it engages in the lock. Maybach 57: in Maybach 57 with rear center seat* if your vehicle configuration has the control panel for the rear functions* on the lower rear enter console. 왘 Press button 2 briefly. 왘 Push storage compartment 1 down- i Maybach 62 with rear center seat*: In the storage compartment/drawer is the rear center console (컄 page 49). i There is no storage compartment/drawer Opening storage compartment Closing storage compartment i The remote control for the rear-cabin audiovisual system (see the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) is located in the storage compartment/drawer. Example illustration from Maybach 57 If necessary: 1 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer 2 Storage compartment/drawer 왘 Close the champagne flute/bottle holder (컄 page 259). or Controls in detail Useful features 왘 Close the folding table* (컄 page 263). 왘 Press button 1 again. 왘 To close, press the cover 1 down- ward. Cover 1 engages automatically. Multifunction compartment* on the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat backrest The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens fully. 왘 To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. Opening/closing the upper storage compartment in rear center console (only Maybach 62) Maybach 62 without partition* Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Cover 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 3 Opening button for upper storage compartment 1 Multifunction compartment 2 Button for opening multifunction compartment 왘 To open, press button 2 or 3. Cover 1 swings upward. Maybach 62 with partition* 1 Cover 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 왘 To open, press button 2. 왘 To close, press the cover 1 down- ward. Cover 1 engages automatically. Opening the multifunction compartment 왘 Press button 2. Multifunction compartment 1 folds out. Closing the multifunction compartment 왘 To close, press multifunction compartment 1 until it engages. Cover 1 swings upward. 253 Controls in detail Useful features Storage pocket (only Maybach 62) Warning! G Storage pockets for Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pockets for Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pockets are located on the left and right side of the rear center console. Storage pockets are located on the back of the front seats. 1 Storage pocket 1 Storage pocket The storage pocket is intended for storing light-weight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the storage pocket. The storage pocket cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. 254 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments between the rear seats Warning! G Opening storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8 왘 Press the chrome label on the cover. Always fold the rear center armrest 6 downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest 6 folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment 5 in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Upper storage compartment with insert for champagne flutes 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 3 DVD player compartment and AUX sockets, headphone jacks 4 CD changer compartment 5 Middle storage compartment 6 Rear center armrest with compartment for telephone, storage compartment/refrigerator** underneath 7 Release catch 8 Ashtray/storage compartment* i For more information on DVD player, AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Opening the upper storage compartment 1 왘 Press button 2. The upper storage compartment opens upward. The compartment opens. Closing storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8 왘 Press the cover closed. The cover engages automatically. Opening/closing the storage compartment in the rear center armrest 왘 To open, release catch 7 and swing cover of the rear center armrest 6 upward. 왘 To close, press the cover of the rear center armrest 6 downward. The cover engages automatically. i There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone compartment. Opening/closing the storage compartment under the rear center armrest 왘 To open, lift up armrest 6. 왘 To close, press the armrest 6 down- ward. 255 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in vehicles with a rear center seat* Opening/closing the telephone compartment 왘 Press release catch 6 and swing cover 5 upward 7. i For more information on DVD player, If the third seat is not occupied, you can also use the seat backrest as an armrest. AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Storage compartments in trunk Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Rear armrest 왘 Pull the top of armrest 1 out and fold it downward. ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight against the armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. 256 Example illustration from Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DVD player CD changer AUX sockets and headphone jacks Storage compartment Cover Release catch To open telephone compartment and access control panel for respective rear functions* 1 Handle 2 Compartment for navigation system DVD drive 3 Storage compartment 4 Handle Opening the compartment 왘 Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. 왘 Swing the cover down. Controls in detail Useful features Closing the compartment Floormats Warning! 왘 Swing the cover up. 왘 Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened. Umbrella An umbrella is located in the trunk. Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2. 1 Eyelet 2 Retainer pin 1 Umbrella 2 Straps 왘 Use straps 2 on the inside of the trunk lid to store and secure umbrella 1. G i Installing and removing for the front seats: To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 63). Installing and removing in the rear: To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the front as possible (컄 page 63). Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement. Removing 왘 Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2. 왘 Remove the floormats. Installing 왘 Lay down the floormat. 왘 Press the floormat eyelets 1 onto re- tainer pins 2. 257 Controls in detail Useful features Cup holders Warning! Cup holders, cockpit Rear cup/bottle holders 1 Cup holder, left 2 Cup holder, right 1 Rear cup holder 2 Release catch for champagne flute/ bottle holder 3 Release catch for cup holder G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Opening Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Press the chrome label of the desired 왘 Press the chrome label on the cover. The compartment opens. cup holder. The cup holder slides out. Closing 왘 Remove cup from holder. 왘 Push the cup holder in until it engag- es. 왘 Press the cover closed. The cover engages automatically. 258 Opening 왘 Press release catch on cup holder 3. The cup holder slides out automatically. Closing 왘 Remove cup from holder. 왘 Take the cups out of the holder. 왘 Press the holder back in until it en- gages. Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder (vehicles with a rear center seat*) Champagne flute/bottle holder Warning! Warning! G When not in use, keep the champagne flute/bottle holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. 1 Cup holder, right 2 Cup holder, left Opening 왘 Press the label of the desired cup holder. The cup holder slides out. Closing 왘 Remove cup from holder. Place only champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range into the champagne flute holder. Only use those flutes designed for use with the holder. Make sure the champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips whenever the flutes are placed in the holder. This will reduce the risk of the flutes becoming loose during vehicle maneuvers. Place only bottles that fit fully within the bottle holder to reduce the possibility of the bottle becoming loose and being thrown around in the vehicle interior during vehicle maneuvers. G Always obey applicable state or province laws regarding passengers consuming alcoholic beverages in the vehicle and/or carrying alcoholic beverages in the vehicle interior. Opening 왘 Press release catch on champagne flute/bottle holder 2 (컄 page 258). The champagne flute/bottle holder slides out automatically. 왘 Take the drip tray out of the opening for the bottle and place it under the opening on the carpet. Magnets hold the drip tray in the correct position. Loose objects being thrown around in the vehicle during vehicle maneuvers may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Push the cup holder in until it engag- es. 259 Controls in detail Useful features Inserting champagne flutes i Use the champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range. Only those flutes are designed for use with the holder. 왘 With the champagne flute/bottle holder open, remove the drip tray from the transmission tunnel and place it in the opening for the bottle. Press the holder closed until it engages. Ashtrays Center console ashtray Removing ashtray insert Warning! G Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position P. With gear selector lever in position P, turn off the engine. 왘 Push sliding button 1 to the right. The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2. 왘 Remove insert from ashtray frame. Example illustration from Maybach 57 Reinstalling the ashtray insert 왘 Place the champagne flutes in the re- 왘 Install insert by pushing back into tainers and press them down lightly. frame until it engages again. The champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips. 왘 To remove the champagne flutes, pull them upright carefully. 왘 Close the ashtray. 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out Closing Opening ashtray 왘 Take the champagne flutes/bottle 왘 Tap lightly on the chrome label on out of the holder. the cover. The ashtray opens automatically. 260 Controls in detail Useful features Rear compartment ashtray Reinstalling the ashtray insert Opening ashtray 왘 Install insert by pushing back into 왘 Lift lid 1 up. frame until it engages again. 왘 Close the ashtray. Rear compartment ashtray (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 왘 Lift ashtray lid 3. Removing ashtray insert 왘 Lift lid 1 up. 왘 Lift ashtray lid 3. 왘 Press sliding button 2 forward. Insert 4 slides out a short distance. 왘 Remove insert 4 from ashtray frame. Reinstalling the ashtray insert 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out 왘 Install insert 4 by pushing back into frame until it engages again. Opening ashtray 왘 Close the ashtray. 왘 Tap lightly on the chrome label on the cover. The ashtray opens automatically. Removing ashtray insert 왘 Push sliding button 1 to the right. 1 2 3 4 Lid Sliding button Ashtray lid Insert The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2. 261 Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighters Warning! G Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter. To avoid possible injury to children sitting in the rear seat, deactivate the operation of the rear door windows (컄 page 100). Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the rear compartment lighter. or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough. To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V power outlets (컄 page 266) in your vehicle whenever possible. i Make sure the override switch is not activated (컄 page 100). The rear lighter will not function if the override switch is activated. 1 Rear compartment lighter When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Rear compartment lighter (vehicles with a rear center seat*) ! The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, 262 1 Center console lighter 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter will pop out automatically when hot. Controls in detail Useful features Non-smokers package* Storage compartment in rear center console Storage compartment in front center console Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) Warning! G Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, you could be injured by the table or by objects flying off the table during 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label 왘 Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover. Storage compartment 1 opens. 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label 왘 Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover. Storage compartment 1 opens. 앫 braking 앫 vehicle maneuvers or 앫 an accident. Always fold the rear center armrest 1 downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest 1 folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. 263 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the folding table 4 To pull out the table 5 To swing the table to the side 6 Table 1 To raise the armrest 2 Loop 3 Folding table 왘 Pull table 6 out vertically 4. 왘 Lift up armrest 1. 왘 Swing the table to the side 5. 왘 Pull up folding table 3 vertically, us- 왘 Lower armrest 1. ing loop 2. 7 8 9 a Fold out table half Table half Move table surface fore and aft Tilt table surface 왘 Fold out table half 8 from 7. 왘 Press button 9 and adjust the table fore or aft to the desired position. 왘 Press button a to adjust the table surface tilt. When you have obtained the desired tilt, release the button. 264 Controls in detail Useful features Closing the folding table 왘 Fold the table halves together. 왘 Swing the table upward vertically. 왘 Press the table until it engages at the base of the folding table. 왘 If necessary, lift up the armrest. 왘 Swing the folding table back com- i The refrigerator continues to operate for up to 2 hours after the ignition has been switched off. If the on-board voltage falls below the minimum level, the refrigerator will be turned off automatically. Refrigerator control Therefore, do not leave any perishable goods in the refrigerator. Do not leave any open groceries in the refrigerator. pletely. 왘 Lower the armrest. Refrigerator** in rear center console Warning! 4 5 6 7 G Always fold the rear center armrest downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. Control knob To increase cooling To decrease cooling To turn off the refrigerator Turning refrigerator on 왘 Turn knob 4 from OFF position 7 clockwise. 1 To release the cover 2 To open the refrigerator 3 Refrigerator Turning refrigerator off Opening the refrigerator 왘 Turn knob 4 counterclockwise to ! In especially humid regions, water can 왘 Lift up the rear center armrest up- condense inside the refrigerator. For this reason, wipe out the refrigerator regularly. For more information on vehicle care (컄 page 342). 왘 Reach into the opening and lift up re- ward. The refrigerator is on. OFF position 7. Make sure the rotary control is turned fully counterclockwise, until an audible “click” is heard. lease catch 1. 왘 Open cover 2. 265 Controls in detail Useful features Regulating the temperature 왘 Turn knob 4 to the desired position. ! When setting max. cooling, the temperature in the refrigerator may fall below freezing point. Objects stored in the refrigerator such as water bottles may burst. Closing the refrigerator 왘 Press the lid down until it engages. Power outlets 1 Socket in the rear center console (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 1 Socket in the front passenger footwell (vehicles with non-smokers package*) The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Flip up cover. 1 Socket in the rear center console 1 Socket in the trunk 266 i Make sure the override switch is not activated (컄 page 100). The socket in the rear center console will not function if the override switch is activated. ! Make sure no fluids come into contact with the socket, as this could cause a short circuit. Controls in detail Useful features Battery charge socket The vehicle is equipped with a battery charge socket. The socket allows for the connection of the Maybach battery charger* designed to charge the vehicle consumer battery or to maintain the existing charge in the vehicle consumer battery while the vehicle is parked and not being driven for long periods of time (on average approximately 3 weeks or more). Not driving the vehicle for such extended periods of time may cause the charge in the vehicle batteries to drop. The socket is located in the storage compartment on the left side of the trunk. Only the Maybach battery charger* should be connected to this socket. 왘 Turn handle 1 90°. 왘 Swing the cover down. 왘 Connect the Maybach battery charg- er* to battery charge socket 2. Follow the separate operating instructions for the Maybach battery charger*. i You can obtain the Maybach battery charger* at any authorized Maybach Studio. Check with an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. Rear window curtain The driver’s button is in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on vehicle equipment configuration, the button in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. Operating from the cockpit i If the battery for electrical consumers is deeply discharged, it may take up to approximately 20 hours for the battery to be charged using the Maybach battery charger*. If faster charging is required, a standard battery charger may be needed. Using a standard battery charger will require that you disconnect and remove the battery for electrical consumers. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 417). Button in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Closing the curtain 왘 Briefly press button 1. The curtain closes automatically. 1 Handle 2 Battery charge socket 3 Storage compartment 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. 267 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain 왘 Briefly press button 2. The curtain opens automatically. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Operating from the rear Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* and with rear seat*) Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains*) 1 To close/open the curtain 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Closing the curtain 왘 Briefly press button 1. The curtain closes automatically. Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains*) 1 To close/open the curtain 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Opening the curtain 왘 Briefly press button 1. The curtain opens automatically. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. 268 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 255). Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain Operating from the cockpit 왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. The curtain will open until you release the button. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close) 왘 Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. The curtain closes completely. Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains* and with rear center seat*) 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Fully opening the curtain (Express-open) 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 256). Closing the curtain 왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance point. The curtain will close until you release the button. ton again. Button in cockpit 왘 Press button 2 past the resistance point and release. The curtain opens completely. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Rear door window curtains* The driver’s switches are in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on equipment, the button in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain i If you open a rear door window without rear door window curtain completely open, the curtain will open first. Closing the curtain 왘 Briefly press upper part 1 of button 3 or 4. The respective curtain closes. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. 269 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain Operating from the rear 왘 Briefly press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4. The respective curtain opens. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 270 Rear button (vehicles with rear center seat*) Rear button 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 255). 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 256). Controls in detail Useful features Closing the curtain 왘 Lightly press upper part 1 of Warning! G button 3 or 4 to resistance point. The respective curtain will close until you release the button. Opening the curtain 왘 Lightly press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4 to resistance point. The respective curtain will open until you release the button. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close) 왘 Press upper part 1 of button 3 or 4 past the resistance point and release. The curtain closes completely. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open) 왘 Press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4 When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the respective button or, if button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button 3 or 4 again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Partition* Operating the partition Warning! G When operating the partition, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. past the point of resistance and release. The curtain opens completely. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. 271 Controls in detail Useful features Button in cockpit Button in rear passenger compartment 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition i Closing the partition from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 100). 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 255). 272 Button in rear passenger compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 256). Controls in detail Useful features Closing the partition Operating the partition curtain 왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance point. The partition will close until you release the button. Opening the partition 왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. The partition will open until you release the button. Fully closing the partition (Express-close) 왘 Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. The partition closes completely. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Button in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Fully opening the partition (Express-open) 왘 Press button 2 past the point of re- sistance and release. The partition opens completely. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Button in rear passenger compartment 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 255). 273 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain 왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. The curtain will open until you release the button. Signaling a connection request from the cockpit The button is located on the lower part of the front center console. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close) 왘 Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. The curtain closes completely. Button in rear passenger compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 256). Closing the curtain 왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open) 왘 Press button 2 past the resistance point and release. 1 On/off button The curtain opens completely. 왘 Press button 1. 왘 To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. point. The curtain will close until you release the button. Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) With the partition closed, you can communicate between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment using the two-way intercom. You can only initiate a voice connection from the rear passenger compartment. The driver can only signal a connection request from the cockpit. 274 A gong sounds in the rear passenger compartment, and the indicator lamp on the button comes on. Controls in detail Useful features Initiating a voice connection from the rear In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console the buttons are on the rear center console. In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* the buttons are in the storage compartment/drawer in the rear center console. Adjusting the volume 왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 until the de- sired volume has been set. Ending the voice connection 왘 Press button 2 again in the rear pas- senger compartment. 1 Volume control 2 Speak button Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 1 Volume control 2 Speak button 왘 Press button 2. A gong sounds in the cockpit, and a voice connection is established between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment. 275 Controls in detail Useful features External communication (special order equipment) With the communication system, you can communicate with persons outside the vehicle over a loudspeaker and an outside microphone, without having to open a door or window. Listening downward. Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel. You will hear what is being said outside of the vehicle. The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel. 왘 Push microphone switch-over 5 Speaking 왘 Press speak button 1 and keep it pressed. You can speak as long as you keep button 1 pressed. 왘 Adjust volume with the volume con- trol button 2. 1 2 3 4 5 Speak button for inside microphone Volume control Loudspeaker for outside microphone Inside microphone Microphone switch-over 왘 Take the control unit out of the glove box. 276 1 Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off Controls in detail Useful features Switching on i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or switches off 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 앫 in case of power surge or undervoltage 앫 in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction 왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- tion of arrow 1. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. i The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator lamp 2 remains on when 앫 the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C) 앫 the temperature of the steering wheel is above 79°F (26°C) i The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, when you switch off the ignition (컄 page 60) and open the driver’s door. G Switching off Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The steering wheel heating is switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. The external antenna must be approved G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. Telephone Warning! tion of arrow 3. Warning! For information on the steering wheel, see “Steering wheel” (컄 page 64). When these conditions do not apply anymore, steering wheel heating continues. 왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- for Maybach vehicles. Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 277 Controls in detail Useful features You can receive and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system (컄 page 164). The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using. Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, calls can only be made via the hands-free system. Mobile phone in the front ! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle. G 왘 Remove the cover for the external an- Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while the vehicle is in motion. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during Opening 앫 braking 앫 vehicle maneuvers or 왘 Press release button 1. 앫 an accident. Mobile phone cradles for GSM or CDMA phones can be installed in the cockpit. These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Maybach Studio. 278 the Information button ¡ (컄 page 285) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. Inserting the mobile phone in the mobile phone cradle See the separate operating manual COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System for instructions on how to use the telephone. Warning! i The Roadside Assistance button • and 1 Compartment lid release button 2 Compartment lid tenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place. Compartment lid 2 opens downward. The telephone handset swings out. Closing 왘 Press button 1 to close. ! To prevent any damage, the mobile phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. 1 Insert the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone cradle Controls in detail Useful features 왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 on cradle 3. 왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow 1, until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages. The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna. i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** out of the starter switch, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately 10 minutes (run-on time). If you place or receive a call during this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed. Changing the mobile phone cradle Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio if you require a different mobile phone cradle for your GSM or CDMA mobile phone. Removing an existing mobile phone cradle: Removing the mobile phone from the cradle The mobile phone is linked to the hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel. The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the key in the ignition switch. The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone’s display. i GSM mobile phone: The phone books contained on the SIM card and in the mobile phone’s memory will be imported. If an identical entry has been stored in both phone books, the entry will appear twice in the multifunction display. You can place or receive phone calls using the t and s buttons in the steering wheel. You can control other functions of the mobile phone via the control system (컄 page 164). 1 Release catch for mobile phone 2 Mobile phone cradle 왘 Press release catch in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle 2. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle 3 Mobile phone cradle 왘 Press release button in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2. 279 Controls in detail Useful features Installing a different mobile phone cradle: Mobile phone in the rear Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®. The Bluetooth® interface is located in the rear armrest. 왘 Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest (컄 page 255). Inserting the Bluetooth® interface into cradle 4 Engage the Bluetooth® interface into cradle 5 Release button 6 Button with indicator lamp 1 Contact plate 2 Recesses 3 Mobile phone cradle 왘 Push the top of the Bluetooth® inter- 왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into face in direction of arrow 4, until the release button 5 engages. recesses 2 of contact plate 1. 왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward until it engages. 1 Insert the Bluetooth® interface 2 Contact 3 Cradle 왘 Slide the lower end of the Bluetooth® interface into contact 2 on cradle 3. 280 The indicator lamp in the button 6 will flash slowly in blue, to indicate that the interface is ready for pairing with a Bluetooth® compatible mobile phone. Controls in detail Useful features ® Initializing pairing of Bluetooth interface and mobile phone 왘 Enter “0000” (four zeros), when The indicator lamp in the button 1 will stop flashing and remain illuminated in blue. The pairing of the Bluetooth® interface with your mobile phone was successful. i Pairing is only required once for each handset. 1 Button with indicator lamp 왘 To initialize pairing, press and hold button 1 on the Bluetooth® interface until the indicator lamp in the button begins to flash rapidly in blue. 왘 Depending on which Bluetooth® ca- pable mobile phone you have, conduct a search for “devices within range”, until you find the Bluetooth® interface with the symbol “MB BTUM”. 왘 Select this symbol. Tele Aid prompted to enter the passkey. ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the Information button ¡, located in the phone compartment to the left of the glove box. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). You will be able to make and receive hands-free phone calls using the speakers and microphones installed in your vehicle. The Tele Aid system You can also switch from hands-free mode to privacy phone mode. (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) i Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio for the most recent list of Bluetooth® capable mobile phones that have been approved for use in your vehicle. The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: 앫 automatic and manual emergency For detailed instructions on how to pair the Bluetooth® interface with the mobile phone, please refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. 앫 Roadside Assistance and 앫 information The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. 281 Controls in detail Useful features The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel or the volume control on the COMAND. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button ç on the steering wheel or use the volume knob on your COMAND head unit. 왘 To activate, press one of the SOS but- tons, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. Warning! G Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. i The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel (컄 page 284). An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console. The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the front telephone compartment (컄 page 286). 282 Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. Warning! i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button • and/ or in the Information button ¡ do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message System self-check Initially, after switching on the ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID INOPERATIVE appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display. G TELE AID INOPERATIVE is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Controls in detail Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or airbags deploy. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover in the overhead control panel labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or with rear center seat* and two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/ drawer in rear center console. For instructions on initiating an emergency call manually (컄 page 284). Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. The Tele Aid system is available if: 앫 it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time. 앫 the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center. Warning! G If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. 283 Controls in detail Useful features Initiating an emergency call manually For Maybach 57 with rear center seat*: the additional SOS button is located in the rear center console. SOS button* in the rear center console SOS button in the rear center console SOS button in the overhead control panel 1 Cover 2 SOS button 284 1 Cover 2 SOS button 1 Cover 2 SOS button Controls in detail Useful features For Maybach 62 with rear center seat*: the additional SOS button is located in the storage compartment/drawer. 왘 Briefly press on the cover of the emergency call button 1 with the inscription SOS. The cover will open. Roadside Assistance button • The Roadside Assistance button • is located in the front telephone compartment. 왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is concluded. 왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re- sponse Center. 왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded. Warning! SOS button* in the storage compartment/ drawer 1 Cover 2 SOS button G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. 1 Compartment lid release 2 Compartment lid 왘 Press button 1. The compartment lid 2 opens downward. 285 Controls in detail Useful features When the connection is established, the message CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. 왘 Describe the nature of the need for 1 Compartment lid release 2 Information button ¡ 3 Roadside Assistance button • 왘 Press and hold Roadside Assistance button • (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to a Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button • flashes while the call is in progress. The message CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. 286 assistance. The Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Maybach technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. The following is only available in the USA: 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡). See system self-check (컄 page 282) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit. Controls in detail Useful features Information button ¡ The Information button ¡ is located in the front telephone compartment (컄 page 286). 왘 Press and hold Information button ¡ (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button ¡ flashes while the call is in progress. The message CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or Maybach USA products and services is available to you. i The indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •). See system self-check (컄 page 282) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center has been established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display. Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit. ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Maybach Studio and have the system checked or contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as soon as possible. Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. i The indicator lamp in the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit. ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The mobile phone switches off. If it is necessary for you to use this phone, then the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the  button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. 287 Controls in detail Useful features i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. Stolen Vehicle Recovery services The SOS button flashes and the message CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. 왘 Report the incident to the police. ter at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. 왘 Pass this number on to the Maybach You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle. Remote door unlock In case that you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not mobile phone: 왘 Contact the Maybach Assistance Cen- 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing. The message CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call. The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. 288 In the event your vehicle was stolen: The police will issue a numbered incident report. Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement. i When the anti-theft alarm or the towaway alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 110) and tow-away alarm (컄 page 111). Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems. Before the integrated remote control can be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information. Warning! G Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment): 5 6 Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator or other device Hand-held remote control button Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. 289 Controls in detail Useful features Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control Step 1: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Step 2: Step 3: Step 5: 왘 Hold the end of hand-held remote 왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from control 5 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping indicator lamp 1 in view. 왘 If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4 and release them only when indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3. 290 Step 4: 왘 Using both hands, simultaneously press hand-held remote control button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons until step 5 is completed. Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds. a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button. Step 6: 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and observe indicator lamp 1. If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released. i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature. Step 7: 왘 To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Controls in detail Useful features Rolling code programming Step 10: Gate operator/Canadian programming To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) 왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press, Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Step 8: 왘 Locate “training” button on the ga- rage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener Operator’s Manual. hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 11: 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process. i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process. Step 4: Step 12: 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 9: Step 13: 왘 Press the “training” button on the 왘 To program the remaining two signal garage door opener motor head unit. The “training light” is activated. If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following: 왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release this button until it has been success컄컄 fully trained. transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps. 291 Controls in detail Useful features 컄컄 왘 While still holding down the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds. 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete. i Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device. You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations. 292 Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button Erasing the remote control memory To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps: 왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button. 왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3. Operation of integrated remote control 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). The codes of all three channels are erased. i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels. Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control, here are some helpful tips: 앫 Check the frequency of the handheld remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices operating between 280-390 MHz. 앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control. 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte- grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. Controls in detail Useful features 앫 While performing step 3, hold handheld remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances. 앫 If another hand-held remote control is available for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure. 앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly. This may help improve transmitting and/ or receiving signals. Infrared reflecting windshield 1 5.1 in (13 cm) 2 26 in (66 cm) 3 Infrared transparent area (pass-through for electronic signals) Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the interior through the windows. The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g. electronic toll collection devices). To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, one infrared transparent area 3 is placed in the windshield. 293 294 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 295 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the “Operation” section, you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle. The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. 앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds. 앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maximum rpm in each gear). 앫 Avoid accelerating by kickdown. 앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever. 앫 Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving). 앫 Select C as the preferred shift program (컄 page 183) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum. 296 ! All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. i Always obey applicable speed limits. Operation Driving instructions Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. To save fuel you should: 앫 Keep tires at the recommended tire inflation pressures. 앫 Remove unnecessary loads. 앫 Allow engine to warm up under low load use. 앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration. 앫 Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly area. Drinking and driving Warning! Power assistance G Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Pedals Warning! G Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360) and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on while driving (see page 380 to page 381). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to 컄컄 exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). 297 Operation Driving instructions 컄컄 For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Brakes Warning! G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in a safe location in sufficient time to avoid an accident. 298 ! Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds. Active braking action through ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 104). If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid level in the reservoir. The brake fluid level in the reservoir may be too low if the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and an acoustic warning sounds although the parking brake is released (컄 page 360). Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear (컄 page 381). Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Operation Driving instructions Warning! G If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. ! When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately park the vehicle, so that the air stream can cool down the brakes faster. Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. Parking Warning! G Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 앫 Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal. 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 앫 Move the gear selector lever to position P. 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. 앫 Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61). 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. 299 Operation Driving instructions Tires Warning! Warning! G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or tire dealer for repairs. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 300 G Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. For more information, see “Tires and wheels” (컄 page 313). Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Warning! G If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. Operation Driving instructions We recommend winter tires (컄 page 338) for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance in comparison to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. Refer to “Rims and tires” in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 436) for a listing of winter tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of: 앫 Maybach 57, Maybach 62, Maybach 62 S: 155 mph (250 km/h) 앫 Maybach 57 S: 171 mph (275 km/h) The factory equipped tires on your vehicle may have a tire speed rating above the maximum speed permitted by the electronic speed limiter. Make sure your tires have the required tire speed rating as specified for your vehicle in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 436), for example when purchasing new tires. For information on how to identify the tire speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire size designation, load and speed rating” (컄 page 326). If you are uncertain about the correct reading of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, any authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to assist you. i For more Information, see “Tire speed rating for winter tires” (컄 page 337). For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 328). Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. i For more Information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (컄 page 338). 301 Operation Driving instructions Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss. Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect. Warning! G If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal. Warning! If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. G For more information, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 337). Standing water ! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them. If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Passenger compartment Warning! G Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. 302 Operation Driving instructions Driving abroad Abroad, there is an extensive Maybach service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Maybach Studio directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Maybach Studio. Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND, radio and telephone Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. Telephones and two-way radios Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. Catalytic converter Your Maybach is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire. Warning! G As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. 303 Operation Driving instructions Emission control Certain parts of the engine and the emission control system serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Maybach Studio authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service procedures must be carried out regularly according to Maybach servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open at all times. Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Warning! G 앫 Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 304 Operation At the gas station The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. At the gas station Refueling Warning! open. 왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. on to it until possible pressure is released. 왘 Take off the cap and set it in the re- Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! cess on the fuel filler flap 2. 왘 To prevent fuel vapors from escaping Turn off the engine before refueling. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your health. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** automatically locks/ unlocks the fuel filler flap. the point indicated by the arrow 1. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. 왘 Push up the fuel filler flap to fully G Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials. 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. 1 Push to open the fuel filler flap 2 Set the fuel cap 왘 Turn the engine off 앫 by using the SmartKey, remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61), open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is now in position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch). 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler noz- zle unit cuts out – do not top off or overfill. Warning! G Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury. 왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it clock- wise until it audibly engages. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. 컄컄 305 Operation At the gas station 컄컄 i Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Check regularly and before a long trip For more information, see “Coolant level” (컄 page 310) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 440). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. For more information on gasoline, see the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system” (컄 page 311). i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the ? lamp to illuminate. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 361). 1 Brake fluid electro-hydraulic brake system only 2 Coolant level 3 Brake fluid 4 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system i Opening hood (컄 page 307). Brake fluid ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 360). 306 Coolant Engine oil level For more information, see “Engine oil” (컄 page 309). Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 406). See also the section on the exterior lamp switch (컄 page 142). Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pressure (컄 page 321). Operation Engine compartment Engine compartment Warning! Hood Warning! G Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. G You could be injured when the hood is open – even when the engine is turned off. Parts of the engine can become very hot. To prevent burns, let the engine cool off completely before touching any components on the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety precautions. This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others. Warning! Opening Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. G Warning! G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system 앫 with the engine running 앫 while starting the engine 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. 1 Release lever 왘 Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar- row. The hood is unlocked. 컄컄 307 Operation Engine compartment 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of Closing approximately 1 ft (30 cm). Warning! G When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. 2 Handle for opening the hood 컄컄 왘 Lift hood slightly. Handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille. ! Do not pull up the hood on handle 2. To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield. 왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radi- ator grille. 왘 Lift bottom of hood at edge of radia- tor grille. The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height. 308 Make sure that the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger you and/or others. The hood will lock audibly. 왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force. Operation Engine compartment Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when 앫 with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off 앫 ADD 1.5 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 1.5 LITERS) 앫 ADD 2.0 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL 앫 the vehicle is new 앫 You can check the engine oil level on the multifunction display. the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). i If you want to interrupt the checking pro- The standard display (컄 page 162) should appear in the multifunction display. cedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel. Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period. ! Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 왘 Press button k or j on the steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display: (Canada: 2.0 LITERS) 왘 If necessary, add engine oil. For adding oil (컄 page 310). For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” (컄 page 440) and (컄 page 441). Other display messages More information on this subject is available at any Maybach Studio. If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear: Checking engine oil level with the control system FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH IGNITION ON When checking the oil level 앫 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator: 왘 Switch on the ignition. 앫 ENGINE OIL LEVEL OK PERFORM SERV ON TIME 앫 ADD 1.0 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL If you see the message: 왘 If engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure. 컄컄 (Canada: 1.0 LITER) 309 Operation Engine compartment 컄컄 왘 If engine is not at operating temper- ature yet, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure. If you see the message: ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WITH ENGINE ON 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 If the engine is at operating tempera- ture, wait 5 minutes before checking oil. 왘 If the engine is not at operating tem- perature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil. If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear: Adding engine oil ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL off. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 310 neck. 왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. ! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 왘 Screw the filler cap 1 back on the filler neck. For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” (컄 page 440) and (컄 page 441). Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Maybach Studio check the automatic transmission. 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 388). 왘 Unscrew the filler cap 1 from filler 1 Filler cap Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool. Operation Engine compartment Warning! Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment. G In order to avoid any potentially serious burns: 앫 Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. 앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. 앫 앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment. 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap 3 Cold coolant level mark 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly ap- proximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure. 왘 Continue turning cap 2 counter- clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct if the level 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the marking 3 inside coolant reservoir 앫 for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher 1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l). During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to water. Premix the windshield washer flu컄컄 id in a suitable container. 왘 Add coolant as required. 왘 Replace and tighten cap 2. For more information on coolant, see “Technical data” (컄 page 443). 311 Operation Engine compartment 컄컄 Warning! G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Wind- shield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). 312 ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. For more information, see “Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio” (컄 page 446). Operation Tires and wheels Tires and wheels When replacing rims, use only Genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. See an authorized Maybach Studio for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Warning! Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used. G Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted: 앫 The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged. 앫 The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed. See an authorized Maybach Studio for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. 앫 Important guidelines Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make. 앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the rim. G 앫 Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads. Warning! 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required. 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm). 앫 When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with samesized wheels all around). Tire care and maintenance Warning! G Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, (컄 page 319). 313 Operation Tires and wheels Tire inspection Warning! Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following: 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 314) 앫 cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber 앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions. Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: 앫 Driving style 앫 Tire inflation pressure 앫 Distance driven G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread. Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. Warning! G Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Recommended minimum tire tread depth: 앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm) 앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm) 1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator) The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 314 Operation Tires and wheels Storing tires ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline. Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to powerwash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire. i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel. Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. 1) The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. 2) The certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle. 1 Driver’s door B-pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the placard with regards to loading your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. 315 Operation Tires and wheels i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information placard 왘 Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement. Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). i Data shown on placard example are for il1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. lustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. 1 Seating capacity information on the Tire and Loading Information placard Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Step 1 왘 Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 316 Operation Tires and wheels Step 2 Step 5 왘 Determine the combined weight of 왘 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Step 3 왘 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Step 6 (if applicable) The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 316). 왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, Step 4 왘 The resulting figure equals the avail- able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 319). 317 Operation Tires and wheels Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from placard Number of Seating occupants configura(driver and tion passengers) Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer weight of all tongue weight (total load limit mioccupants nus combined weight of all occupants) 1 5 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs 1500 lbs front: 2 Occupant 2: 180 lbs rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 140 lbs Occupant 5: 120 lbs 2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs 3 1500 lbs 1 front: 1 The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available. For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (컄 page 319). 318 Occupant 1: 150 lbs Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Trailer tongue load Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (컄 page 319) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification label. The certification label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical data” (컄 page 432). The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is 10 percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load (컄 page 319) must never exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale. Your Maybach has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. We not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle. Recommended tire inflation pressure Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort. 319 Operation Tires and wheels In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 320). i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. Important notes on tire inflation pressure Warning! G If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops: 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures 320 앫 Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects. 앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load. If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure. i Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature. Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated. Warning! G Follow recommend tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure: 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure. i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. 왘 Install the valve cap. 왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. 321 Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure electronically The tire inflation pressure monitor only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in tire inflation pressure in one or more of the tires. You can call up the tire inflation pressure monitoring display using the control system (컄 page 157). i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: until the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display. (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i After you have reactivated the tire inflation pressure monitor, the current tire inflation pressures will only be shown after a few minutes’ driving time. During this time, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES i Possible differences between the readings of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. The readings issued by the control system are more precise. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 162). 322 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Warning! G When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. Operation Tires and wheels i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner’s manual. Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure monitor is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction. Reactivating the tire inflation pressure monitor 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display: The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations: 앫 if you have changed the tire inflation pressure 앫 if you have replaced the wheels or tires 앫 if you have installed new wheels or tires 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 157). TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES i If you are transporting a deflated tire in the vehicle, do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until 앫 the deflated tire is no longer in the vehicle 앫 you have inflated the tire to the correct tire inflation pressure 왘 Press the reset button J in the instrument cluster (컄 page 154). The following message will appear in the multifunction display: MONITOR CURRENT TIRE PRESSURES? 컄컄 323 Operation Tires and wheels 컄컄 왘 Press the æ button. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED The tire inflation pressure monitor will now monitor the tire inflation pressure values of all four tires. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES This display appears until the individual tire inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed (컄 page 322). If you wish to cancel activation: 왘 Press the ç button. If one of the following messages appears in the multifunction display: 앫 TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRESSURE 앫 TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT 324 왘 Check the tire inflation pressures and correct them if necessary. Warning! G 왘 Reactivate the tire inflation pressure monitor. Flat tire If a tire is deflating the message: CAUTION-TIRE DEFECT appears in the multifunction display. If a tire inflation pressure is low the message: CHECK TIRE appears in the multifunction display. Additional warning messages may also appear in the multifunction display. Read and observe the warning messages in the multifunction display and follow the instructions for each message. See the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 374) and (컄 page 396) for a listing of warning messages and instructions. Driving with underinflated or damaged tire(s) produces worse than normal and unexpected vehicle operational characteristics. Overriding the speed limitation is potentially dangerous as higher speeds and quick acceleration, as produced by your depressing the accelerator pedal fully and briskly, may intensify adverse vehicle handling characteristics. Warning! G You should pull over immediately. The vehicle no longer has steering stability and may skid. Change the wheel. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Operation Tires and wheels Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Warning! Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can: 앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear 앫 adversely affect fuel economy 앫 lead to tire failure from being overheated 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics G Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Overinflated tires Overinflated tires can: 앫 adversely affect handling characteristics 앫 cause uneven tire wear 앫 be more prone to damage from road hazards 앫 adversely affect ride comfort 앫 increase stopping distance 325 Operation Tires and wheels Tire labeling Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire. Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires: 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards (컄 page 331) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (컄 page 329) 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 330) 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure (컄 page 331) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material (컄 page 333) 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating (컄 page 326) 8 Load identification (컄 page 329) 9 Tire name Tire size designation, load and speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. For more information, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 436). 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tire width Aspect ratio in % Radial tire code Rim diameter Tire load rating Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. 326 Operation Tires and wheels General: Tire code Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation. The tire code 3 (컄 page 326) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards. Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tire width The tire width 1 (컄 page 326) indicates the nominal tire width in mm. Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 326) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width. At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/ 40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 328). Rim diameter The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 326) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in). Tire load rating The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (컄 page 330) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lb. Warning! G The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (컄 page 334) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious injury to you or others. Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” (컄 page 329). i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326) are also referred to as “service description”. 327 Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating Summer tires The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire. Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326) are also referred to as “service description”. 328 앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326). If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 326) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability. If a service description 5 and 6 (컄 page 326) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). 앫 Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire. Operation Tires and wheels All-season and winter tires Index Load identification Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) 1 or M+S.for winter tires i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure. 1 Load identification i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. In addition to tire load rating, special load identification 1 may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326). The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire. XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire. Light Load: designates a light load tire. 329 Operation Tires and wheels Manufacturer’s identification mark Maximum tire load The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 denotes the tire manufacturer. New tires have a mark with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires (컄 page 313). Tire size 1 2 3 4 DOT Manufacturer’s identification mark Tire size Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer) 5 Date of manufacture i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. DOT (Department of Transportation) A tire branding symbol 1 which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. The code 3 indicates the tire size. Tire type code The code 4 may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture The date of manufacture 5 identifies the week and year of manufacture. The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year. For example, “3106” represents the 31st week of 2006. 330 1 Maximum tire load rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support. Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Operation Tires and wheels For more information on tire load rating (컄 page 328). For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (컄 page 316). Maximum tire inflation pressure Warning! G Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire. 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (컄 page 319) for proper tire inflation. 331 Operation Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 A AA All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Traction Temperature The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning! G Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 332 The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Warning! G The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. Operation Tires and wheels Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not). 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. Bar Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Air pressure Cold tire inflation pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars. Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mi (1.6 km). Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage. Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo. DOT (Department of Transportation) A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. 333 Operation Tires and wheels GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Maximum load rating Production options weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. 334 Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, total load limit, and production options weight. Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lb). Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. PSI (Pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on Tire and Loading Information placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for normal driving conditions. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Operation Tires and wheels TIN (Tire Identification Number) Total load limit Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided. Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two. Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. Tire speed rating Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. 335 Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires Warning! G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a frontto-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (컄 page 315). In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. 336 If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (컄 page 315). Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires). Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure, activating the tire inflation pressure monitor if necessary. Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Only use Genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. ! Your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor. Electronic components are built into the wheel. Do not use mounting tools in the area of the valve as they could damage the electronic components. To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Maybach Studio. For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 400) and (컄 page 413). Operation Winter driving Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Maybach Studio. This service includes: 앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration. 앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point (컄 page 445). 앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well-charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures. 앫 Tire change. Tire speed rating for winter tires If you install winter tires, have an authorized Maybach Studio limit the speed of your vehicle to the speed rating of the winter tires installed. When the speed limitation is activated, the segments up to the set speed limitation are illuminated, for example, 130 mph (210 km/h) as in the illustration below. Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Vehicle speed limitation for winter tires in speedometer 337 Operation Winter driving Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP® in winter operation. For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design. Warning! G Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation. 338 Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains: 앫 Using snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations (컄 page 436). 앫 Use snow chains in pairs and on rear wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions. ! If snow chains are mounted to the front wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle components. The tires or the vehicle could be damaged as a result. 앫 select the raised level of the vehicle level control system (컄 page 234). Other settings may result in damage to your vehicle. Use only snow chains that are approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Any authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to advise you on this subject. 앫 Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains. i When driving with snow chains, you may ® Snow chains ! When driving with snow chains, always wish to deactivate the ESP (컄 page 106) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction. Operation Maintenance Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Maybach Studio, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display. 'A' SERVICE IN XXX DAYS i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles, depending on vehicle production date): 'A' SERVICE IN X DAY 앫 FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since the last service and calculates other maintenance service work required. 앫 The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services. 'A' SERVICE DUE NOW Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times /mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when the next maintenance service is due. Starting approximately 1 month before the next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A): 'A' SERVICE IN XXXXX MI The type of maintenance service due is indicated in the multifunction display: 9 Basic service (A) ´ Extended service (B) i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles. Canada vehicles, depending on vehicle production date): The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since the last maintenance service and calculates other maintenance service work required. (Canada: IN XXXXX KM) 339 Operation Maintenance Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving. You can also clear it yourself. Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display example service A): 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY XXXX MI (Canada: XXXXX KM) 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY X DAY In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears. 1 Reset button J 왘 Press reset button J 1 on the instru- ment cluster. The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 157). 340 Any authorized Maybach Studio will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service. Calling up the maintenance service indicator display You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 157). 왘 Press button k or j until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol 9 or ´ and the service deadline appear in the multifunction display. i If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator display. Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :. Operation Maintenance Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Maybach Studio or directly from Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Maybach Studio correct it. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 341 Operation Vehicle care Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle. The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly. Warning! G Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by: 앫 Air pollution 앫 Road salt 앫 Tar 앫 Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove: 앫 Grease and oil Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Fuel Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children. 앫 Coolant 앫 Brake fluid 앫 Bird droppings 앫 Insects 앫 Tree resins, etc. i Your authorized Maybach Studio offers a high-end care product case* to ensure that your Maybach receives optimal care at all times and at any location. 342 Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions: 앫 near the ocean 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions) 앫 during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. Operation Vehicle care We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles at an authorized Maybach Studio. Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Maybach Studio. Power washer Paintwork, painted body components ! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork. Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Refrigerator** Tar stains Clean out the refrigerator regularly with a vinegar-and-water solution. Mix the solution in a ratio of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts water. Allow the refrigerator to dry before using it again. Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. Paint Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Paint Cleaner approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. 왘 Use the appropriate Touch-Up Stick approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.). 343 Operation Vehicle care Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. Corrosion protection, such as Anticorrosion Wax approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. When washing the vehicle underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Hand-wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. 왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint. Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are preferable. ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which uses caustic spray. Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash. diffused jet of water. ! Make sure the windshield wiper switch is Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. set to 0 (컄 page 74). Otherwise, e.g. the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage. 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. 왘 Rinse with clean water and thorough- ly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. 344 ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors. Operation Vehicle care i After running the vehicle through an au- Ornamental moldings tomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 347). This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield. For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth. When leaving the car wash, make sure the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate. ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings. For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water. ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface. 345 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the Distronic** system sensor cover Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors ! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers. Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. ! To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. 1 Distronic system sensor cover 1 Parktronic system sensors in front bumper 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water and a non-scratching cloth to clean sensor cover 1. ! To prevent scratches or damage, never apply strong force and only use a soft, nonscratching cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. 왘 Restart the engine after cleaning sen- sor cover 1. 346 as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the bumpers. Operation Vehicle care Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens The camera is in the license plate recess next to the handle for the luggage compartment lid. ! Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera: 앫 with a high-pressure cleaner 앫 with a dry cloth and high pressure 앫 with aggressive cleaning agents You could otherwise damage the camera. Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades ! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap into place. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear. 왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a 왘 Only use clean water and a soft, non- 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (컄 page 75). camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles with plenty of water. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the vehicle’s on board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. 왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed. 1 Camera lens 왘 Be careful not to apply wax to the G Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). scratching cloth to clean the camera lens 1. Warning! 왘 With wiper arms in vertical position, switch off the ignition (컄 page 60). clean cloth and detergent solution. 왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**). Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. 347 Operation Vehicle care ! To clean the window interior, do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the front, rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may damage the windows. Plastic and rubber parts Hard plastic trim items 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent 왘 Use Interior Care approved by us for or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a Light alloy wheels lukewarm solution. If possible, clean wheels once a week. The surface may temporarily change color. If this is the case, wait for it to dry. 왘 Use Wheel Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. ! The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When applying Tire Care and Wheel Care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, take care not to spray them on the brake disks. 348 Warning! G Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents will make the surface porous and vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment. use on Maybach vehicles onto a soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. ! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface. Instrument cluster and front cup holders 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. ! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents. ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on these parts. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface. Steering wheel and gear selector lever 왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- oughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Operation Vehicle care Carpets 왘 Use Carpet and Fabric Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles for cleaning the carpets. Rear cup holder/bottle holder For cleaning purposes, you can push back the cover plate of the cup holder. 왘 Press button 2. The cup holder opens. 왘 Push one of the release catches 3 upward and, at the same time, press release catch 1 for the cup/bottle holder. 왘 Push the cover plate 4 back. 왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap. ! The seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. ! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents. 왘 After cleaning, close the cup/bottle holder. The next time the holder is opened, the cover plate slides out with it. Example illustration from Maybach 57 Headliner and shelf below rear window 1 2 3 4 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- Release catch for cup/bottle holder Release catch for cup holder Release catch for cover plate Cover plate Seat belts poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Warning! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. Roof lining 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. 349 Operation Vehicle care Warning! G Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Maybach for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. Leather upholstery Please note that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or high temperature by showing wrinkles for example. 왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. ! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to the upholstery. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Nubuck leather Electrotransparent roof* The nubuck leather upholstery is treated with a protective coating. You can lower the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof. 왘 Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with damp microfiber cloth to remove dust and other light stains. 왘 Carefully dab nubuck leather uphol- stery with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains. ! Do not use Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles on nubuck leather or any solvents to clean nubuck leather. Warning! Make sure no passengers are sitting in the rear passenger compartment when the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is being lowered. The passengers could otherwise be injured by the panel. Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather. Lowering the inside panel If in doubt about cleaning any nubuck stain, please consult your Maybach Studio for assistance. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). Wood trims 왘 Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive. 왘 Make sure the vehicle is stationary and that the gear selector lever is in position P. 왘 Pull the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) (컄 page 218). At the same time, push the switch for the rear interior lighting (컄 page 148). 왘 Press and pull both switches until you see the message PANORAMA ROOF UNLOCKED appear in the multifunction display. The inside panel is unlocked. 350 G Operation Vehicle care 왘 Push the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel forward (to open the screen). The inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is lowered and the screen is opened. ! Make sure the rear passenger compartment is empty and that the inside panel does not come into contact with any objects left in the rear compartment. Do not lean against the lowered inside panel. 왘 You can clean the glass panels with a commercially available glass cleaner and a moist cloth. Closing the inside panel 왘 After cleaning, pull the switch for the electrotransparent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) until the screen is completely closed. Push the inside panel upward until it engages. Warning! G No passengers may ride in the rear passenger compartment if the inside panel has not been or cannot be locked. Have the inside panel repaired immediately by an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 The message disappears from the multifunction display. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. ! Do not clean the screen! Allow the cleaned surfaces to dry before closing the electrotransparent roof. 351 352 Practical hints What to do if … Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Batteries Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 353 Practical hints What to do if … What to do if … General information: Lamps in instrument cluster If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during Problem v Possible cause/consequence ® the lamp self-check when switching on ignition, have it checked and replaced if necessary. Suggested solution ® The yellow ABS/ESP The ESP has been switched off. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 107). warning lamp comes on Risk of accident! Exceptions: (컄 page 106). while the engine is run왘 If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt ® When the ESP is switched off it will not ning. your speed and driving to the prevailstabilize the vehicle if the system ing road and weather conditions. recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or If the ESP® cannot be switched on: that a wheel is spinning. The cruise control and the Distronic** sys- 왘 Observe additional messages in the multifunction display. tem are deactivated and cannot be switched on. 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho- rized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 354 Practical hints What to do if … Problem v Possible cause/consequence ABS/ESP® The yellow warning lamp flashes while driving. Suggested solution ESP®, The ABS or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected tractle as possible. tion loss in at least one tire. 왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator. The cruise control and the Distronic** system are deactivated and cannot be 왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the switched on. prevailing road and weather conditions. 왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®. Exceptions (컄 page 106). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has dropped below the reserve warning lamp serve mark. comes on while driving. 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 305). 355 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution l Only vehicles with You are too close to the vehicle in front of 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to inDistronic**: The red dis- you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance. tance warning lamp comes on while driving. l Only vehicles with 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- 왘 Apply the brakes immediately. Distronic**: The red discle ahead of you. 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation. tance warning lamp 앫 The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver comes on while driving nized a stationary obstacle on your to avoid hitting an obstacle. and you hear a warning probable line of travel. sound. - The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution. lamp comes on while has switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are Wheels may lock during hard braking, also switched off (see messages in display). driving. reducing steering capability. 왘 Observe additional messages in the The brake system is still functioning normultifunction display. mally but without the ABS, the BAS and the ESP® available. 왘 Have the system checked at an authoIf the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, rized Maybach Studio as soon as possiother systems such as Parktronic, ble. Distronic**, the navigation system and the Failure to follow these instructions inautomatic transmission can also malfunc- creases the risk of an accident. tion. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off. The batteries may not be sufficiently charged. 왘 When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out. If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: 왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the batteries checked. 356 Practical hints What to do if … Problem < Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution The red seat belt telltale The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belt. comes on for a maxipassengers to fasten your seat belts before Regardless of whether the seat belts mum of 6 seconds after driving off. are fastened or not, the seat belt tellstarting the engine. tale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine. You hear a warning You have forgotten to fasten your seat chime for a maximum of belt. 6 seconds after starting the engine. 왘 Fasten your seat belt. The warning chime stops sounding. The red seat belt telltale You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts. comes on while the vehi- gotten to fasten your seat belts. The seat belt telltale goes out. cle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving. There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses senger seat and put them in a safe the front passenger seat as being occupied. place. The seat belt telltale goes out. 357 Practical hints What to do if … Problem < Possible cause/consequence During driving the red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning chime with increasing intensity. Suggested solution The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph 왘 Fasten your seat belt. (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pasThe seat belt telltale goes out and the senger have forgotten to fasten your seat warning chime stops sounding. belts. There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses senger seat and put them in a safe the front passenger seat as being occupied. place. The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding. i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened. 358 Practical hints What to do if … Problem H Possible cause/consequence The yellow warning lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor comes on. Suggested solution The tire inflation pressure monitor detects 왘 Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding a rapid or significant loss of pressure in at abrupt steering and braking maneuleast one tire. vers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Read and observe messages in the multifunction display. 1 Warning! The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving. G In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others. There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the neartems. The airbags or Emergency Tensioning est authorized Maybach Studio. Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident. Warning! G When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual. 359 Practical hints What to do if … Problem ; (USA only) 3 Possible cause/consequence The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound. Suggested solution You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 72). (Canada only) The red brake warning 앫 There is a malfunction in the electro-hy- 왘 Observe the message in the multifunclamp comes on when draulic brake system. tion display (컄 page 379). the engine is running Risk of accident! 앫 There is insufficient brake fluid in the and you hear a warning reservoir. 왘 Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe losound. cation or as soon as it is safe to do so and notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. Warning! G Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. 360 ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence ? The yellow engine mal- There is a malfunction in: function indicator 앫 The fuel management system lamp comes on while 앫 The ignition system driving. ± 앫 The emission control system (Canada only) 앫 Systems which affect emissions (USA only) Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode. Your fuel tank is empty. Suggested solution 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi- ble by an authorized Maybach Studio. An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal. 왘 After refuelling, start, turn off, and re- start the engine three or four times in succession. The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked. i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements. 361 Practical hints What to do if … Lamp in center console Lamp Problem PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning. off indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat. Warning! Possible cause/consequence G If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 362 Suggested solution 왘 Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 369). Practical hints What to do if … Lamp Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF The indicator lamp does not illu- The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between minate and/or does not remain ilseat cushion and child seat and check inluminated with the weight of a stallation of the child seat. typical 12-month-old child in a 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supstandard child restraint or less on plemental weight onto the seat are the front passenger seat. present. 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight. 왘 If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 왘 Read and observe messages in the multi- function display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 369). Warning! G less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or 363 Practical hints What to do if … Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster. Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual. Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system (컄 page 169) displays both cleared and uncleared messages. If the message memory menu is not displayed, there are no messages. High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display with in red color. Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J (컄 page 154) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 158). Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J (컄 page 154) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 158). They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 169). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear. Warning! G All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Maybach Studio. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction 364 display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/ warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Bring the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey. On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the malfunction display. High priority messages appear in red color. For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections: 앫 Text messages (컄 page 365) 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 376) Practical hints What to do if … Text messages Display ABS Possible cause/consequence ABS, ESP INOPERATIVE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible solution The ABS and the ESP® have switched 왘 Continue driving with added caution. off due to a malfunction. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. The BAS is also switched off. The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. still functioning normally but without ® the ABS, the ESP , and the BAS avail- Failure to follow these instructions increases able. the risk of an accident. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic, Distronic**, the navigation system and the automatic transmission may also malfunction. The ABS and the ESP® are not avail- 왘 Drive a short distance with added caution able due to a malfunction. The BAS is at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph also deactivated. (20 km/h). The system’s self-diagnosis may not be completed yet. When the message disappears, the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS are available again. The electro-hydraulic brake system is If the message does not disappear: still functioning normally but without 왘 Continue driving with added caution. the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS availWheels may lock during hard braking, reable. ducing steering capability. If the ABS control unit is malfunction- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized ing, other systems such as Parktronic, Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Distronic**, the navigation system Failure to follow these instructions increases and the automatic transmission may the risk of an accident. also malfunction. 365 Practical hints What to do if … Display ABS Possible cause/consequence ABS, ESP INOPERATIVE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL ESP® The ABS and were deactivated because of insufficient power supply. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts. Possible solution When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS and ESP® are operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear. The BAS is also switched off. If the message in the multifunction display The electro-hydraulic brake system is does not disappear: still functioning normally but without 왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked. the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS available. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic, Distronic**, the navigation system and the automatic transmission may also malfunction. REPLACE AIR CLEANER The air filter is clogged. 왘 Have the air filter checked by an autho- COMFORT FUNCTIONS CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE The battery for electrical consumers has insufficient voltage and can no longer supply the convenience functions such as seat ventilation*. As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: COMFORT FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE AGAIN. The electrical consumers are switched on again. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Distronic** is malfunctioning or the display is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Distronic** is switched off and is tem- 왘 Try activating Distronic** again later. porarily unavailable. DISTRONIC 366 rized Maybach Studio. soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display DISTRONIC Possible cause/consequence CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible solution 왘 Clean if necessary the Distronic** cover in the front bumper (컄 page 346). the Distronic** cover in the front 왘 Restart the vehicle. bumper is dirty. Distronic** is switched off because: 앫 앫 the functionality is impaired due to heavy rain or thick fog. or Distronic** becomes operational again without re-starting the engine if: 앫 dirt comes off during driving (e.g. slush or snow) 앫 the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface drying) 앫 the message disappears from the multifunction display 앫 you see the speed last stored blink in the multifunction display for 5 seconds. You can now use Distronic** normally. Warning! G Distronic** cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic** or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The distance control may be impaired even before the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The message DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic** will be turned off. 367 Practical hints What to do if … Display ESP Possible cause/consequence INOPERATIVE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible solution ESP® The detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution. switched off. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized The ABS may not be operational. Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The electro-hydraulic brake system is Failure to follow these instructions increases still functioning normally but without the risk of an accident. the ESP® available. ESP CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL The ESP® is deactivated because the power supply has been interrupted. 왘 Synchronize the ESP®: With the vehicle sta- tionary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and The electro-hydraulic brake system is then to the right. still functioning normally but without the ESP® available. If the ESP® message does not go out: 왘 Continue driving with added caution. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. ! When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a curb. 368 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ENABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL Front passenger front airbag is activated while driving even though a child, small individual, or object below the system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense supplemental weight. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following: 왘 Apply the parking brake. 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Open the front passenger door. 왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary. 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present. 왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn on the ignition (컄 page 60). (Continued on next page) 369 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Monitor the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 25) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following: With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on, 앫 the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the front passenger front airbag. 앫 the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ENABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL or the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display. If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out. If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. 370 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following: 왘 Apply the parking brake. 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60). 왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle. 왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 63). 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat. 왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn on the ignition (컄 page 60). (Continued on next page) 371 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Monitor the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 25) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following: With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on, 앫 the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the front passenger front airbag. 앫 the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ENABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL or the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display. If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out. If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated with an 372 adult occupant on the front passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution MOVE SELECTOR LEVER TO P You have tried to turn off the engine 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P. with the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61) with the gear selector lever not in P. SRS MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au- authorized Maybach Studio. thorized Maybach Studio. 373 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRES. There was a tire inflation pressure warning message. 왘 Reactivate the tire inflation pressure moni- The yellow warning lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor lights up and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire inflation pressure check. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60). TIRE PRESSURE DISPLAY ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN IGNITION IS ON The tire inflation pressure monitor is using the current pressure values as the basis for monitoring. TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 374 tor after correcting the tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 323). Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence TIRE PRES. MONITOR CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE The tire inflation pressure monitor is 왘 Remove the additional wheel sensor from temporarily inoperative because the vehicle. an additional wheel sensor is in the vehicle 앫 a radio source is causing interference 앫 unrecognized wheel sensors are installed As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the tire inflation pressure mon앫 the maximum temperature of the itor automatically becomes active again. wheel sensor has been exceeded The tire inflation pressure monitor or 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor the wheel sensor is malfunctioning. checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRES. MONITOR NOT OPERATIONAL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Warning! 앫 Possible solution A wheel without proper sensor was installed. 왘 Have the wheels checked. G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 375 Practical hints What to do if … Symbol messages Display P AIRMATIC STOP, CAR TOO LOW Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The vehicle level is too low. 왘 Wait until the vehicle level has been adjust- ed. The message then disappears. The vehicle level control is malfunctioning. In addition, the following message appears: 왘 Stop and press the vehicle level control but- AIRMATIC MALFUNCTION 왘 Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid ton to select a higher vehicle level (컄 page 234). damaging the front fenders. 왘 Listen for scraping noises. 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 376 AIRMATIC MALFUNCTION The Airmatic system has only limited 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). operation. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as The display for Airmatic or the Airsoon as possible. matic system itself is malfunctioning. AIRMATIC VEHICLE RISING Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection. Practical hints What to do if … Display # BATTERY/ALTERNATOR STOP VEHICLE Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The battery, the alternator or the electrical system control unit is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical energy and therefore has only limited operation. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. 왘 Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon Possible causes: it is safe to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. 왘 Read and observe messages about the elec- tro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display. as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt. 앫 alternator malfunctioning If it is broken: 앫 broken poly-V-belt 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en- gine will overheat due to an inoperative waDo not forget that the brake system ter pump which may result in damage to the requires electrical energy and may be engine. Notify an authorized Maybach operating with restricted capability. Studio. Considerably greater brake pedal If it is intact: force is required and the stopping 왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized distance is increased. Maybach Studio. Adapt driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness. 왘 Read and observe messages about the elec- tro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display. ! RELEASE PARKING BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake engaged. 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 72). 377 Practical hints What to do if … Display T Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as in the emergency operation mode. it is safe to do so. Considerably greater brake pedal 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 77). force is required and the stopping 왘 Do not drive any further. distance is increased. 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by The maximum speed is limited to blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other 55 mph (90 km/h). sizable, heavy objects (컄 page 414). BRAKE MALFUNCTION STOP VEHICLE 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call for Roadside Assistance (컄 page 285). Warning! G Driving while these messages are displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! 378 If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423). Practical hints What to do if … Display ; (USA only) Possible cause/consequence REDUCED BRAKE POWER START ENGINE Possible solution The battery has insufficient voltage 왘 Start the engine. and cannot supply sufficient power The message disappears when sufficient voltto the electro-hydraulic brake system. age is available. 3 (Canada only) Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. 379 Practical hints What to do if … Display ; (USA only) Possible cause/consequence REDUCED BRAKE POWER VISIT WORKSHOP 3 (Canada only) Possible solution The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Continue driving with added caution. in the emergency operation mode. 왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced Considerable greater brake pedal braking responsiveness. force is required and the stopping 왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized distance is increased. Maybach Studio. 왘 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. Warning! G Driving while these message is displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! 380 If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423). Practical hints What to do if … Display ; (USA only) BRAKES OVERHEATED DRIVE CAREFULLY Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The brake system is overheated due to an excessive load on the brakes. 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system. 왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking. 3 왘 When driving down slopes, shift into a lower (Canada only) gear to use the engine’s braking power (컄 page 182). 왘 Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool down the brakes. SERVICE BRAKE VISIT WORKSHOP There are malfunctions, but the elec- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as tro-hydraulic brake system is operatsoon as possible. ing normally. BRAKE FLUID PLEASE CHECK LEVEL There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe loreservoir. cation and notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. Warning! G Driving with the message BRAKE FLUID PLEASE CHECK LEVEL displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause the braking system to fail! 381 Practical hints What to do if … Display 2 BRAKE PAD WEAR Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The brake pads have reached their wear limit. 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as pos- ! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. Warning! G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact your Maybach Studio for further information. The electro-hydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver or passenger door is opened, when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns), see “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 107). 382 sible at an authorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints What to do if … Display B TOP UP COOLANT SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 310). Comply with all warnings while doing so. 왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned. ! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Do not drive without a sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage. 383 Practical hints What to do if … Display D COOLANT STOP, TURN ENG. OFF Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon Among other possible causes, the poly-V-belt could be broken. as it is safe to do so. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken: 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en- gine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is intact: 왘 Wait for the message to disappear before re- starting the engine. Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. (Continued on next page) 384 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge (컄 page 23). If the coolant temperature rises again: 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Warning! G 앫 Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. 385 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution D The cooling fan for the coolant is mal- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge functioning. (컄 page 155). 왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible. 왘 Have cruise control or Distronic** checked by Î CRUISE CONTROL INOPERATIVE Cruise control or Distronic** is malfunctioning. ± DISPLAY MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP Certain electronic systems are unable 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an to relay information to the control authorized Maybach Studio. system. The following systems may have failed: VISIT WORKSHOP G DISPLAY MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP 앫 Coolant temperature display 앫 Tachometer 앫 Cruise control display There may be a malfunction in the: 앫 Fuel injection system 앫 Ignition system 앫 Exhaust system 앫 Fuel system an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The displays for several systems have 왘 Continue driving with added caution. malfunctioned. Some systems them- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as selves may also have malfunctioned. soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. 386 Practical hints What to do if … Display N Possible cause/consequence ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP Possible solution The engine oil has dropped to a criti- 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 309) and cal level. add oil as required. 왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. There is water in the oil. When the message: ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT GAS STATION (Canada: 1.0 LITER) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level. 왘 Have the oil checked. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved engine oil. For information on approved engine oils, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 387 Practical hints What to do if … Display N ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT GAS STATION Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 310) and check the engine oil level (컄 page 309). (Canada: 1.0 LITER) ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all There is a risk of damaging the enlegal requirements with respect to its disposgine or the catalytic converter. al. ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, TURN ENG. OFF There is no oil in the engine. There is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as a danger of engine damage. possible. 왘 Turn off the engine. 왘 Add engine oil. _ Y ENGINE OIL LEVEL CANNOT BE MEASURED The measuring system is malfunction- 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an auing. thorized Maybach Studio. ENTRY POSITION DO NOT DRIVE Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have 왘 Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering not yet moved to their preset driving wheel have moved to their driving positions. positions. The message will disappear. You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to do so. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 307). There is otherwise danger of an accident. Ê V 388 The trunk is open. 왘 Close the trunk. You are attempting to drive with one 왘 Close the doors. or more doors open. Practical hints What to do if … Display F Possible cause/consequence Possible solution KEY CHECK BATTERY The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** batteries are discharged. 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 405). KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as not recognized while the engine is it is safe to do so. running because 왘 Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. 앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally is not in the vehicle locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine is stopped. 앫 there is strong radio-frequency interference KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with momentarily not recognized. KEYLESS-GO** in the vehicle. 왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch if necessary. 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** out KEY STILL IN VEHICLE The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** left in the vehicle was recognized while locking the vehicle from the outside. AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY SmartKey in starter switch position 1 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter or 2. switch. LIGHTS OFF OR REMOVE KEY The exterior lamp switch is set to U 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 142). and you have forgotten to take out or the SmartKey. The parking lamps re왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter main switched on. switch. of the vehicle. 389 Practical hints What to do if … Display F Possible cause/consequence Possible solution You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter REPLACE KEY The SmartKey is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as AUTO-LIGHT INOPERATIVE The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (컄 page 173). REMOVE KEY switch. soon as possible. . 왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 390 TURN OFF LIGHTS You have removed the SmartKey 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M from the starter switch, opened the (컄 page 142). driver’s door and left the headlamps on or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the vehicle and left the headlamps on. ACTIVE HDLMP MALF. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The active Bi-Xenon headlamps have 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as malfunctioned several times in sucsoon as possible. cession. ACTIVE HEADLAMPS UNOPERATIVE The active Bi-Xenon headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display . Possible cause/consequence Possible solution HIGH BEAM LEFT The left high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as HIGH BEAM RIGHT The right high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as LOW BEAM LEFT The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as LOW BEAM RIGHT The right low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as tioning. soon as possible. FOGLAMP LEFT The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as FOGLAMP RIGHT The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as TURN SIGNAL LEFT SIDE MIRROR The turn signal in the left exterior 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as rear view mirror is malfunctioning. soon as possible. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. TURN SIGNAL RIGHT SIDE MIRROR The turn signal in the right exterior 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as rear view mirror is malfunctioning. soon as possible. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. soon as possible. soon as possible. soon as possible. soon as possible. soon as possible. 391 Practical hints What to do if … Display . MARKER LAMP FRONT LEFT Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized MARKER LAMP FRONT RIGHT The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning. PARKING LAMP LEFT The left front standing lamps are mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning. (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. PARKING LAMP RIGHT The right front standing lamps are malfunctioning. Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. CORNERING LAMP LEFT The left corner-illuminating lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 392 CORNERING LAMP RIGHT The right corner-illuminating lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible malfunctioning. (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L The left front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning. (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display . FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as BRAKE LAMP-LEFT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. BRAKE LAMP-RIGHT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The right brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as ing. A substitute bulb is being used. soon as possible. 3RD BRAKE LAMP The high mounted brake lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as functioning. soon as possible. REAR FOGLAMP The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. LICENSE PLATE LAMP LEFT The left license plate lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning. (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. LICENSE PLATE LAMP RIGHT The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning. soon as possible. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible (컄 page 407) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. REVERSE LAMP LEFT The left reverse lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as ing. soon as possible. REVERSE LAMP RIGHT The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 393 Practical hints What to do if … Display . 394 Possible cause/consequence Possible solution PARKING LAMP-LEFT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The left rear standing lamps are mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible. ing used. PARKING LAMP-RIGHT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The right rear standing lamps are malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used. TAIL LAMP-LEFT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as substitute bulb is being used. soon as possible. TAIL LAMP-RIGHT AUXILIARY LAMP ON The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as A substitute bulb is being used. soon as possible. REAR TURN SIGNAL, L AUXILIARY LAMP ON The left rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible. ing used. REAR TURN SIGNAL, R AUXILIARY LAMP ON The right rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible. ing used. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution _ STEERING GEAR OIL PLEASE CHECK The steering oil has dropped to a crit- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as ical level. soon as possible. L TELE AID BATTERY INOPERATIVE The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an auTele Aid system is malfunctioning. If thorized Maybach Studio. the vehicle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not be operational. TELE AID NOT ACTIVATED You do not have a Tele Aid service contract or you have not extended your existing one. FUEL FILLER FLAP OPEN A loss of pressure has been detected 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 305). in the fuel system. The fuel cap may If it is not closed properly: not be closed properly or the fuel sys왘 Close the fuel cap. tem may be leaky. If it is closed properly: \ 왘 Obtain a Tele Aid service contract or have your existing one extended in an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 Have the fuel system checked by an autho- rized Maybach Studio. W WASHER FLUID PLEASE TOP UP The fluid level has dropped to about 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 311). 1/ of total reservoir capacity. 3 395 Practical hints What to do if … Display H Possible cause/consequence Possible solution TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT The pressure is low in one or more tires. 왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 321). TIRE PRESSURE CAUTION, TIRE PRES. One or more tires is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the damaged wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. The tire pressure in one or more tires 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding is already below the minimum value. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. The tire pressure in one or more tires TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TIRES is low. 왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required. 왘 If necessary, change the damaged wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 396 You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, LF CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. The left front tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. low. 왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 321). TIRE PRESSURE, LF CHECK TIRES 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, RF CAUTION, TIRE PRES. The right front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 397 Practical hints What to do if … Display H Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right front tire inflation pressure 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. is low. 왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 321). TIRE PRESSURE, RF CHECK TIRES 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, LR CAUTION, TIRE PRES. The left rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. The left rear tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. low. 왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 321). TIRE PRESSURE, LR CHECK TIRES 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or 398 brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, RR CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. The right rear tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. low. 왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 321). TIRE PRESSURE, RR CHECK TIRES 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413). 왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re- placed at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 399 Practical hints Where will I find ...? Where will I find ...? First aid kit The first aid kit is stored in the storage compartment under the front passenger seat. Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor. 왘 Fold the cover forward. 1 2 3 4 5 왘 Remove first aid kit. 왘 Lift up the trunk floor cover and en- 1 Tabs 왘 Press tabs 1 together. i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items. 400 Wheel chock Spare wheel Luggage bowl Vehicle tool kit Vehicle jack gage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk. You can now remove the tools and accessories. ! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from trunk edge and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk. The vehicle tool kit includes: 앫 One pair of universal pliers 앫 Two open-end wrenches 앫 One hex-socket wrench 앫 One interchangeable slot/Phillips screwdriver 앫 One towing eye bolt 앫 One wheel wrench 앫 One alignment bolt 앫 One fuse extractor 앫 One fuse chart 앫 Spare fuses Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking/locking in an emergency Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key, see “Anti-theft alarm system” (컄 page 110). i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm: Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch. 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key 1 왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of 2 Mechanical key Unlocking arrow. 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing. 왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s door lock until it stops. 왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 counter- clockwise to position 1 until the locking knob moves up. The driver’s door is unlocked. 왘 Pull the door handle to open the driv- er’s door. 401 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking and opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. ! The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. 왘 If necessary, lock the trunk with the mechanical key (컄 page 127). Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle should now be locked. 왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 back and remove it from the trunk lid lock. Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, do the following: 왘 Close the front passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk. 1 Mechanical key 2 Unlocking in an emergency 3 Handle 왘 Insert the mechanical key 1 into the trunk lid lock until it stops. 왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 counter- clockwise to position 2. The trunk unlocks. 왘 Pull on handle 3. The trunk opens. 402 i If you cannot close the trunk with the remote trunk opening/closing switch, lower the trunk lid manually and close it with hands placed flat on the trunk lid until it is engaged in its lock. 왘 Press the central locking switch on the center console (컄 page 129). 왘 Check to see whether the locking knobs on the doors have moved down. 왘 If necessary, push them down manu- ally. 왘 Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey (컄 page 401). 왘 Check whether the trunk is locked. 1 Locking 2 Mechanical key 왘 Insert the mechanical key 2 into the driver’s door lock until it stops. 왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 clockwise to position 1 until the locking knob moves down. The driver’s door is locked. i This procedure does not arm the antitheft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap. Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur. The tilt/sliding sunroof roof drive is located behind the cover on the overhead control panel. Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**: 왘 Remove crank 2 from the Operator’s 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the 왘 Insert crank 2 through hole. KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 78). 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again. 왘 Pull cover 1 off at the location marked by the arrow. Manual pouch. 왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to: 앫 slide roof closed 앫 raise roof at the rear 왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to: 앫 slide roof open 앫 lower roof at the rear i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly. The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually (컄 page 213). 1 Cover 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start- er switch. 2 Crank 403 Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Removing the T-handle crank The key for emergency operation is included in the vehicle tool kit. Operating the power tilt/sliding sunroof manually 왘 Pull cover 2 off of the rear center in- The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind cover 2 in the roof lining with the rear passenger compartment instruments. 왘 Insert crank 1 inclined through hole. strument. 왘 Turn crank 1 clockwise to: 앫 slide roof closed 앫 raise roof at the rear 왘 Turn crank 1 counterclockwise to: 앫 slide roof open 앫 lower roof at the rear The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually (컄 page 217). 1 Vehicle tool kit 2 T-handle crank 3 Pipe key 왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 123). 왘 Take out vehicle tool kit (컄 page 400). 왘 Open pouch. 왘 Pull both parts of T-handle crank 2 out of pipe key 3. 404 1 T-handle crank 2 Cover 왘 Join pieces of T-handle crank 1 together. Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** are discharged, the vehicle can only be locked or unlocked using the mechanical key (컄 page 401). It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! SmartKey/SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. 왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow. 왘 Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey/SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** (컄 page 401). G Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive substances. Therefore keep the batteries out of reach of children. 3 Battery 4 Contact spring If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint. i When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at any Maybach Studio. 왘 Remove the batteries 3. 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment 왘 Insert mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow in side opening. 왘 Using mechanical key 1, push the gray slide to unlatch battery compartment 2. batteries 3 under the contact spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing up. 왘 Return battery compartment 2 into the housing until it locks into place. 왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey/SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** (컄 page 401). 왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey/ SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. 405 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times. Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Maybach Studio for headlamp adjustment. 406 i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging. i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction: 앫 Rear turn signal lamps 앫 Brake lamps 앫 Rear parking lamps 앫 Tail lamps Read and observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 393). Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Front lamps Lamp Rear lamps Type 1 Additional turn signal and side marker lamp LED 2 Turn signal lamp SAE J573 2357 A 12.8 V-30CP Lamp 9 High mounted brake lamp Type LED a License plate lamp C 5 W 3 Side marker lamp W 5 W 4 Low beam and high beam lamp (active headlamps) Xenon1 D2S-35 W 5 Front fog lamp H3 55 W 6 Corner-illuminating lamp H3 55 W 7 Parking and standing lamp W 5 W Blue b Brake lamp Tail, parking and standing lamp LED LED Side marker lamp LED Backup lamp H 24 W Rear fog lamp, LED (driver’s side only) Turn signal lamp LED 8 High beam flasher H7-55 W 1 Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons (high voltage), do not replace the Xenon bulb yourself. See an authorized Maybach Studio. 407 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Notes on bulb replacement Warning! G Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not come on, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 앫 Replacing bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first: Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio: 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (컄 page 142). 앫 Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you Additional turn signal lamp and side marker lamp in the exterior rear view mirrors 앫 Backup lamp 앫 touch or move it when hot 앫 Bi-Xenon lamp 앫 drop the bulb 앫 Fog lamps 앫 scratch the bulb 앫 Rear fog lamp 앫 High mounted brake lamp 앫 Brake lamp 앫 Rear side marker lamp 앫 Rear turn signal lamp 앫 Tail lamp 앫 Rear parking and standing lamp Keep bulbs out of reach of children. Wear eye and hand protection. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 앫 Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs. 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease. 408 ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio. 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307) (except for turn signal and side marker lamps). 1 Housing cover for corner-illuminating lamp, high beam flasher bulb, parking and standing lamp 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for side marker 4 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon) housing cover Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam flasher bulbs Corner-illuminating lamps 왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408) 왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408) counterclockwise and pull out. 왘 Twist bulb socket 5 counterclock- wise and pull out. 왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove. 왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. 5 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp 7 Bulb socket for corner-illuminating lamp twist clockwise. 왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. Parking and standing lamp bulb 왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408) Low beam and high beam bulbs Warning! 왘 Reinsert bulb socket 5 in lamp and counterclockwise and pull out. G Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. counterclockwise and pull out. 왘 Press bulb holder for corner-illuminating lamp 7 (컄 page 409) upward and to the left in direction of arrow. 왘 The bulb holder disengages. 왘 Remove bulb from lamp and pull white cable out of black cable connector. 왘 Insert cable of new bulb into black ca- ble connector. 왘 Insert new bulb into lamp and en- gage bulb holder for corner-illuminating lamp 7 into position. 왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. 왘 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb. 왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6. 왘 Insert a new bulb in the socket. 왘 Reinstall bulb socket 6. 왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. 409 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front turn signal and side marker lamp bulb 왘 Turn the wheels so that the wheel at the housing you need to work on is turned inward. This will provide easier access to the lamp cover. 왘 Secure the vehicle from moving by applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in position P. 왘 Make sure the engine and ignition are turned off. Warning! G 왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. 왘 Reinsert bulb socket 3 in lamp and Before reaching into the wheel housing, make sure you have secured the vehicle from moving by applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in position P. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. Unexpected vehicle movement while you are working near the wheel housing may cause serious personal injury and/or an accident. twist clockwise. 왘 Replace cover 8 (컄 page 410) and turn it clockwise. License plate lamp Front turn signal bulb 왘 Twist bulb socket 2 (컄 page 408) counterclockwise and pull out. 왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove. 왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. 왘 Reinsert bulb socket 2 in lamp and twist clockwise. 왘 Replace cover 8 (컄 page 410) and turn it clockwise. 8 Cover in the wheel housing trim 왘 Turn cover 8 counterclockwise and remove cover. Side marker lamp bulb 왘 Twist bulb socket 3 (컄 page 408) counterclockwise and pull out. 왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove. 410 1 Screws 2 License plate lamp 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (컄 page 142). 왘 Loosen both screws 1. 왘 Remove license plate lamp 2. 왘 Replace the bulb. 왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp 2. 왘 Retighten the screws 1. Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Replacing wiper blades Warning! ! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position. Removing wiper blades 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1. 왘 Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (컄 page 75). G they snap into place. 왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the vehicle’s on board electronics have status 0) before cleaning a wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury. Warning! to wiper arm. G Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped. As a result, you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident. 1 Wiper arm vertical 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until 왘 Slide the wiper blade 2 sideways out of retainer. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear. 왘 With wiper arm in vertical position 1, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. 411 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades 왘 Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on the wiper arm. 왘 Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm. 왘 Fold the wiper arm back so that blade rests on windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. ! Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, you should have this work carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio. 412 Practical hints Flat tire Flat tire Preparing the vehicle 왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when possible. 왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position. 왘 Set the parking brake. i Open the door only when conditions are safe to do so. 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway. Mounting the spare wheel The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full-sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional. 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78). 앫 it is not more than 6 years old 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start- 앫 rim and tire are the same model as the regular wheels Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**: 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 79). 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again. Warning! 왘 Remove the spare wheel. 왘 Place spare wheel in wheel well and Spare wheel Vehicles with SmartKey: er switch. 왘 Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise (컄 page 400). Storing the spare wheel When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you can use the spare wheel as a regular wheel if: 왘 Move the gear selector lever to P. Removing the spare wheel secure it with luggage bowl. 왘 Turn the luggage bowl clockwise to its stop. Preparing the vehicle 왘 Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle jack out of trunk. 왘 Take the spare wheel out of wheel well. G If the spare tire is more than 6 years old or is not the same model as the regular tires, have the spare tire replaced with a new tire at the nearest Maybach Studio. Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare tire. For more information on spare wheel, see “Technical data” (컄 page 436). 413 Practical hints Flat tire Lifting the vehicle Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill, place the wheel chock and the other sizeable, heavy object as follows: 왘 Place wheel chock 1 and another sizeable suitable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on. 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chock 1 and another sizable suitable objects. When changing wheel on a level surface: 왘 Place wheel chock 1 in front of 414 G The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support tube hole built into the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack support tube hole. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. 1 Wheel chock and another sizeable suitable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. Warning! 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but 2 Two-piece wheel wrench 왘 Take the two-piece wheel wrench 2 out of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble wheel wrench. do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench). The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings. Practical hints Flat tire 왘 Crank ratchet 5 up and down until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Warning! G The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. 3 Jack 4 Jack support tube hole 5 Ratchet Warning! ment bolt 6 supplied in the tool kit. 왘 Remove the remaining bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. 왘 Remove the wheel. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Mounting the new wheel 앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle. 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat Removing the wheel G against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Warning! Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the vehicle may fall off the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle. G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call 컄컄 Roadside Assistance. 왘 Take ratchet 5 out of vehicle tool kit. 왘 Place ratchet 5 on jack 3 so that you can see the letters UP. remove. 왘 Replace this wheel bolt with align- 앫 왘 Insert jack 3 fully into tube hole 4 up to the stop. 왘 Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and 6 Alignment bolt 415 Practical hints Flat tire 컄컄 Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct mounting bolts. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack. Lowering the vehicle 왘 Place ratchet on jack so that you can Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). see the letters DOWN. 왘 Lower vehicle by cranking ratchet up and down until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight. 왘 Remove the jack. 왘 Before storing the jack in the trunk, it should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in. 왘 Place the wheel bolt wrench, chock, alignment bolt and jack back in the trunk. Replacing jack support tube cover 왘 Slide tongue of cover under the up- per edge of the tube opening. 왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. 왘 Applying even pressure, press cover until it snaps into place. Be careful not to damage the locking tabs or clamp the plastic retaining strap. 왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly. Warning! G Use only Genuine equipment Maybach wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. 416 1-5 Wheel bolts 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). ! You can also secure the damaged wheel down into the spare wheel well in the trunk. Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor (컄 page 321) until the depressurized tire is no longer in the vehicle. Practical hints Batteries Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries: 앫 The starter battery (located in the engine compartment) 앫 The battery for electrical consumers (located in the trunk) These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals. If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Maybach Studio about steps you need to observe. G Warning! Keep children away. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Follow the instructions in this Operator’s Manual. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Wear eye protection. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. 1 Negative terminal 2 Starter battery 3 Cover over positive terminal 417 Practical hints Batteries As with any other battery, disconnect the consumer battery if you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time to prevent battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles to maintain the battery charge. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. Warning! 4 Cover over positive terminal 5 Battery for electrical consumers 6 Negative terminal ! The consumer battery located in the trunk is a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to open the consumer battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged. Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals. 418 G ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Maybach Studio. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. G Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Warning! Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 417). Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Practical hints Batteries Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 107). Disconnecting the batteries ! Always disconnect the batteries in the order described below, even if you only want to charge the starter battery, for example. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. i Using the Maybach battery charger* (컄 page 267), it is only possible to charge or maintain the existing charge in the battery for electrical consumers, not the starter battery. 왘 Depress parking brake firmly and move gear selector lever to position P. 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78). 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. 왘 In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Open Warning! G With a disconnected battery 앫 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61) on the gear selector lever will have no effect the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P the driver‘s door. 왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 123). 왘 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (컄 page 417). 왘 Remove trunk floor from right hand side of the trunk. The consumer battery is located in the trunk on the right hand side. 왘 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (컄 page 417). 왘 Disconnect negative terminal from consumer battery. 왘 Open hood. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side. 왘 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (컄 page 417). 왘 Disconnect negative terminal of start- er battery. 왘 Remove cover from positive terminal. 왘 Disconnect the positive lead of con- sumer battery and of the starter battery. Removing the batteries Removing the consumer battery 왘 Loosen the screws that hold the con- sumer battery in the trunk in place. 왘 Remove battery’s support and bracket. 왘 Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery). 왘 Take battery out of trunk. 419 Practical hints Batteries Removing the starter battery 왘 Loosen the screw that holds the start- er battery in the engine compartment in place. 왘 Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery). 왘 Swing the bar up and remove bat- tery. er battery and of the starter battery and fasten covers. 왘 Connect negative lead of the starter battery in the engine compartment. 왘 Charge batteries in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer. 왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order. ! The batteries, their filler caps and the venReconnecting the batteries G Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit* approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. An accessory battery charge unit* specially adapted for Maybach vehicles and tested and approved by us is available, permitting the charging of the battery for electrical consumers in its installed in its installed position. Contact an authorized 420 왘 Connect positive lead of the consum- 왘 Connect negative lead of the con- sumer battery in the trunk. ! Never invert the terminal connections. 왘 Reinstall carpet on the right hand side of the trunk. 왘 Have a Maybach Studio check engine control units for error messages and have them erased. tilation tubes must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Charging and reinstalling the batteries Warning! Maybach Studio for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the Maybach battery charger*. ! Always connect the batteries in the order i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of consumer battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting): 앫 Set the clock. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 앫 Synchronize the ESP® (컄 page 368). 왘 Install starter battery in the designat- 앫 Synchronize side windows (컄 page 210). ed location in the engine compartment. 앫 Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 213) or (컄 page 217). described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. 왘 Install consumer battery in the desig- nated location in the trunk. 왘 Attach supports and brackets and tighten screws. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Practical hints Jump starting Jump starting Warning! G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. If the starter battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following: 앫 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a higher voltage battery could damage the vehicle‘s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Read all instructions before proceeding. ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. 앫 Use only jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running. ! Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery installed in the engine compartment. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit. If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. Warning! G Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (컄 page 417). 421 Practical hints Jump starting 왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side. charged battery and run at idle speed. 왘 Connect negative terminal 1 of the 왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not charged battery with negative terminal 3 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first. touch. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers, ex- cept hazard warning flashers or work lights. 왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi- cle. 왘 Apply parking brake. 왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P. 왘 Open hood (컄 page 307). 1 Negative terminal of charged battery 2 Positive terminal of charged battery 3 Negative terminal of discharged battery 4 Positive terminal of discharged battery 왘 Connect positive terminal 2 of the charged battery with positive terminal 4 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 2 first. ! Never invert the terminal connections. 422 Now you can again turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances. 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 1 and then from positive terminals 4 and 2. You can now turn on the lights. 왘 Have the starter battery checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints Towing the vehicle Towing the vehicle We recommend that Maybach vehicles be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 111) and the automatic central locking (컄 page 176). When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed. Warning! G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if: 앫 the engine will not run 앫 there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system 앫 there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2. Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 107). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. 423 Practical hints Towing the vehicle ! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the gear selector lever must be in position N and the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). ! Towing of the vehicle should only be Installing towing eye bolt i The gear selector lever will remain locked in position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. For more information, see “Batteries” (컄 page 417) or “Jump starting” (컄 page 421). 1 Cover on right side of front bumper done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following: With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (컄 page 61) in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 176). 424 1 Cover on right side of rear bumper Practical hints Towing the vehicle Removing cover Removing towing eye bolt 왘 Pry off cover 1 using lower recess. 왘 Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock- 왘 Lift cover off to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt. Installing towing eye bolt 왘 Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench out of the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400). 왘 Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into wise with wheel wrench. 왘 Unscrew towing eye bolt. 왘 Store towing eye bolt and wheel wrench in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk. Installing cover 왘 Fit cover 1 and snap into place. its stop and tighten with wheel wrench. 425 Practical hints Fuses Fuses The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating. The following aids are available to help you replace fuses (컄 page 426): 앫 Fuse chart 앫 Spare fuses 앫 Fuse extractor i Blown fuses must be replaced by like fuses (recognizable by the color and amperage) with the amperage recommended in the fuse allocation chart. A Maybach Studio will be happy to advise you. Warning! G Only use fuses approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles and which have the specified amperage for the system in question. Using other fuses may cause an overload and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. ! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Maybach Studio. 426 ! Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged. Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400). Replacing fuses Before you start to replace fuses, do the following first: 앫 In the engine compartment on the driver’s side (컄 page 427) 앫 In the engine compartment on the passenger side in front of the firewall (dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment) (컄 page 427) 왘 Park the vehicle. 앫 In the dashboard on the passenger-side (컄 page 427) 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start- 앫 In the trunk on the driver’s side (컄 page 428) Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**: Aids for replacing fuses Fuse chart The fuse chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400). The amperages of the fuses are also given there. Spare Fuses Spare Fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400). 왘 Switch off all electrical consumers. Vehicles with SmartKey: 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78). er switch. 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 79). 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again. Practical hints Fuses Fuse boxes in engine compartment Opening Opening 왘 Take crank out of vehicle document 왘 Open the passenger door. pouch. 왘 Loosen retaining screws with crank. 왘 Remove cover from fuse box. Closing 왘 Re-attach cover to fuse box. 왘 Make sure the cover fits correctly. 왘 Tighten retaining screws with crank. 1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side Fuse box in passenger compartment 왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow. 왘 Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using lever. 왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove. Closing 왘 Hook cover 1 into the opening at the front. 왘 Press cover 1 back on until it engag- es. 2 Fuse box cover, passenger-side 1 Cover ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard, as this could damage it. 427 Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in the trunk Opening 왘 Turn locking knob 1 90°. 왘 Pull trim panel 2 upward and remove it. Closing 왘 Attach trim panel 2 into the opening at the top. 왘 Turn locking knob 1 90°. 1 Locking knob 2 Trim panel 428 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 429 Technical data Parts service Parts service The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle. All authorized Maybach Studios maintain a stock of Genuine Maybach Parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Genuine Maybach Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Maybach vehicles. Therefore, Genuine Maybach Parts should be installed. 430 ! The use of non-Genuine Maybach Parts and accessories not authorized by us for use on Maybach vehicles could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. Technical data Warranty coverage Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Maybach Studio will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty 앫 Emission System Warranty 앫 Emission Performance Warranty 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Maybach Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Maybach Studio. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Maybach Studio arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. 431 Technical data Identification labels Identification labels 1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can be found in the following locations: 앫 on the certification label 앫 embossed under a cover in the trunk 앫 lower edge of windshield 432 Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label (Canada vehicles) 2 VIN 3 Paintwork code 2 VIN 3 Paintwork code i Data shown on certification label are for illustration purposes only. These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration. Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Technical data Identification labels 4 VIN 5 Engine number (engraved on engine) 6 VIN (lower edge of windshield) 7 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards Vacuum line routing diagram label i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 433 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive Layout of poly-V-belt drive 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 8 Air conditioning compressor 9 Idler pulley a Idler pulley b Idler pulley 434 Technical data Engine Engine Model Maybach 57 (240.078) 1 Maybach 62 (240.178) 1 Maybach 57 S (240.079) 1 Maybach 62 S (240.179) 1 Engine 285 285 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 12 12 Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) 3.25 in (82.60 mm) Stroke 3.43 in (87.00 mm) 3.66 in (93.00 mm) Total piston displacement 336.4 cu in (5513 cm3) 364.9 cu in (5980 cm3) Compression ratio 9:1 9:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 1 2 543 hp/5250 rpm 2 604 hp/4800-5100 rpm 2 (405 kW/5250 rpm) (450 kW/4800-5100 rpm) 664 lb-ft/2300–3000 rpm 738 lb-ft/2000–4000 rpm (900 Nm/2300–3000 rpm) (1000 Nm/2000–4000 rpm) Maximum engine speed 5950 rpm 6100 rpm Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 Poly-V-belt 2713 mm 2713 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. 435 Technical data Rims and tires Rims and tires ! Only use tires which have been and tested and approved for your vehicle by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles can be identified by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall: 앫 MO = Maybach Original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may result in damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 436 ! Using tires other than those approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles can have detrimental effects, such as 앫 poor handling characteristics 앫 increased noise 앫 increased fuel consumption Moreover, tires and rims not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result. i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Maybach Studio. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 320) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 329). If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle. i The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory-equipment, but can be purchased from an authorized Maybach Studio. Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires Model Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 S Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8.5 J x 20 Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) 275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load) 275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load) Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8 J x 19 Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) 275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S. 275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S. Model Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 S Rim (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8.5 J x 20 Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) 275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load) 275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load) Summer Winter 1 2 tires1 tires1,2 Radial-ply tires Not available as factory equipment. Spare wheel Summer 1 tire1 Radial-ply tire 437 Technical data Electrical system Electrical system Generator (alternator) 14 V/350 A Starter motor 12 V/1.8 kW Starter battery 12 V/40 Ah Electrical consumer battery 12 V/95 Ah Spark plugs NGK IFR 6 Q-G Electrode gap 0.028 in (0.7 mm) Tightening torque 15–22 lb-ft (20–30 Nm) 438 Technical data Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions Model Maybach 57 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 Maybach 62 S Overall vehicle length 225.5 in (5728 mm) 225.5 in (5728 mm) 242.7 in (6165 mm) Overall vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out) 84.0 in (2134 mm) 84.0 in (2134 mm) 84.0 in (2134 mm) Overall vehicle height 61.9 in (1572 mm) 61.3 in (1557 mm) 61.9 in (1573 mm) Wheelbase 133.5 in (3390 mm) 133.5 in (3390 mm) 150.7 in (3827 mm) Track, front 65.9 in (1675 mm) 65.9 in (1675 mm) 65.9 in (1675 mm) Track, rear 66.7 in (1695 mm) 66.7 in (1695 mm) 66.7 in (1695 mm) Weights Roof load maximum no roof load Trunk load maximum 220 lb (100 kg) ! To avoid potential damage to the roof, solar panel* or electrotransparent roof*, roof rails and any roof-mounted devices must not be used. 439 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Warning! Capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only products and approved by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or inquire at your Maybach Studio. G If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment. Keep service fluids out of the reach of children. For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing. Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Engine with oil filter Model 10.5 US qt (10.0 l) Approved engine oils Automatic transmission 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 2.1 US qt (2.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Power steering approx. 1.45 (1.65 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) Front wheel hubs approx. 0.35 oz (10 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Cooling system approx. 18 US qt (17.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Maybach 57 Maybach 62 approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 S approx. 2.59 US qt (2.45 l) Low temperature cooling system Fuel tank including a reserve of 440 29.1 US gal (110.0 l) 3.7 US qt (14.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum Posted Octane 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON) Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Model Capacity Air conditioning system Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 1 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) 7.1 US qt (6.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 446). Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Please follow Maintenance System (U.S vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Engine oil additives ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system. ! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur. Brake fluid Warning! G During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. Only brake fluid approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles is recommended. Your authorized Maybach Studio will provide you with additional information. 441 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Premium unleaded gasoline Warning! G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! Turn off the engine before refueling. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your health. ! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions: 앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. 앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. 앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage. 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. Fuel requirements Only use premium unleaded fuel 앫 The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. 442 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. We recommend only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits. After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: 앫 Warm-up hesitation 앫 Unstable idle 앫 Knocking/pinging 앫 Misfire 앫 Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, we recommend only the use of additives approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label. Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to the engine operation. ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. For a listing of approved products, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: 앫 Corrosion protection 앫 Freeze protection 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point) The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection. ! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/ Antifreeze separately from each other, could cause engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. 443 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution or other products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles of equal specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level. For information on other products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles of equal specification, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 444 To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approximately -35°F [-37°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approximately –49°F [–45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions. The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Maybach Studio. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life. Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/ Antifreeze agent. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio for service. The anticorrosion/antifreeze quantities listed in the table below are in relation to total filling capacity. Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Approx. freeze protection All models (main cooling system) -35°F (-37°C) -49°F (-45°C) 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) 9.9 US qt (9.4 l) Maybach 57, Maybach 62 (low temperature cooling system) 1.16 US qt (1.1 l) 1.27 US qt (1.2 l) Maybach 57 S, Maybach 62 S (low temperature cooling system) 1.37 US qt (1.3 l) 1.27 US qt (1.2 l) 445 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. The windshield washer reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l). 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Warning! Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water: 앫 (1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal [4.0 l] water) G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze: 앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent (1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal [4.0 l] solvent) 446 Index A ABS Indicator lamp 23, 103, 356 Messages in display 365 ABS/ESP® Warning lamp 354 Accelerator position, automatic transmission 181 Accessory weight 333 Accident 76 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Headlamps Adaptive Damping System see ADS Additional turn signals 407 ADS 233 Air cleaner see Air filter Air conditioning refrigerant 441 Air conditioning system see Automatic climate control Air conditioning, Cooling 200, 208 Air distribution 195, 207 Air filter Message in display 366 Air pressure 333 Air recirculation mode 196 Air vents 192, 201, 203 Air volume 195, 207 Airbags 83 Children 84 Front, Driver 86 Front, Passenger 86 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 362 Safety guidelines 85 Side impact 87 Window curtain 87 Airmatic DC 233 Messages in display 376 Setting vehicle level 234 Suspension tuning 233 Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 400, 415 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 440, 443, 445 Antiglare, Rear view mirrors 186 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti-theft alarm systems 110 Immobilizer 110 Indicator lamp 110 Tow-away alarm 111 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 255 Ashtrays 260 Aspect ratio 333 Audio menu 162 Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 186 Automatic central locking 129 Activating/deactivating, Control system 176 Automatic climate control 191 Air conditioning refrigerant 441 Air conditioning, Cooling 200, 208 Air distribution 195, 207 Air recirculation mode 196 Air vents 192, 201, 203 Air volume 195, 207 Charcoal filter 198 Control panel, Front 193 Control panel, Rear 206 Front defroster 195 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 196 Overview of front passenger compartment 192 Overview of rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 202 Maybach 62 204 Rear window defroster 190 Residual engine heat and ventilation 200 Setting the temperature 195, 207 Automatic headlamp mode 143 Automatic lighting control, Interior lighting 148 Automatic locking when driving 129 Automatic shift program 183 447 Index Automatic transmission 178 Accelerator position 181 Automatic shift program 183 Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) 185 Gear ranges 182 Gear selector lever 178 Gear selector lever position 70, 179 Gear selector lever positions 180 Gear shifting malfunctions 185 Kickdown 181 One-touch gearshifting 184 Program mode selector switch 26, 27, 183 Shifting procedure 179 Transmission fluid level 310 Warning sounds (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) 79 AUX sockets 255, 256 B Backrest Multicontour seats 136 Power seats 63, 132, 133, 135 Backrest supports Lumbar region 137 Shoulder region 137 Backup lamps Replacing bulbs 407 Bar 333 BAS 104 448 Batteries, SmartKey Checking battery condition 116 Replacing 405 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Checking battery condition 121 Replacing 405 Batteries, vehicle 417 Charge socket (Battery for electrical consumers) 267 Charging 420 Disconnecting 419 For electrical consumers 417 For starter 417 Jump starting 421 Reconnecting 420 Reinstalling 420 Removing 419 Bead 333 Beverage holder see Cup holder Bi-Xenon see Headlamps Bottle holder 259 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 441 Brake warning lamp 360 Checking 306 Message in display 381 Brake lamp High mounted 407 Messages in display 393 Replacing bulbs 407 Brake pads Message in display 382 Brake warning lamp 23, 360 Brakes 298 Warning lamp 360 Break-in the vehicle 296 Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs C California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for 11 Can holder see Cup holder Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants 440 Cargo area see Trunk Cargo tie-down hooks 247 Carpet, Cleaning and care of 349 Catalytic converter 303 CD changer Compartment for 255, 256 Central locking Automatic 176 Locking/unlocking from inside 129 Central locking/unlocking switches 129, 130 Certification label 432 Champagne flute holder 259 Setting down champagne flutes 260 Charcoal filter 198 Index Children in the vehicle 95 Airbags 84 Blocking of rear window operation 100 Infant and child restraint systems 96 LATCH-type child seat anchors 99 Override switch 100 Tether attachment points 98 Cigarette lighter 262 Clock 156 In the rear 31, 33, 35, 37 Instrument cluster 23 See separate operating instructions Cloth upholstery, Cleaning and care of 349 COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch 74, 145 Control system 157 Control system menus Audio menu 162 Distronic** menu 167 Navigation menu 166 Settings 170 Standard display 162 Telephone 164 Trip computer 167 Vehicle status message memory 169 Control system submenus Convenience 177 Instrument cluster 172 Lighting 172 Vehicle Convenience submenu Setting automatic locking 176 Coolant 310, 443 Adding 311 Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 445 Capacities 440, 445 Checking coolant level 310 Messages in display 383, 384 Temperature 304 Temperature gauge 23, 155 Warning lamp 384 Cornering lamp Messages in display 392 Replacing bulbs 407, 409 Courtesy lighting 153 Cruise control 221 Cruise control lever 227 Cup holder 25, 258 Rear Cleaning 349 Curb weight 333 Curtains Partition curtain* 273 Rear side windows* 269 Rear window 267 Delayed switch-off Exterior lamps 174 Interior lighting 175 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties While driving 76 While starting 71 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer 162 Dimensions, Vehicle 439 Direction of rotation, Tires 315 Displays Digital speedometer 162 Maintenance service indicator 339 Messages in display 365 Multifunction display 157 Outside temperature 23, 155 Showing malfunctions 169 Symbol messages 376 Text messages 365 Vehicle status messages 364 Vehicle system settings, Control system 170 Distance to empty (Range), Trip computer 168 D Daytime running lamp mode 144 Setting 173 Deep water see Standing water Defrosting, Rear 190 449 Index Distronic** 223 Activating 227 Cleaning system sensor 346 Deactivating 229 Distance warning function** 230 Driving hints 231 Menu 167, 226 Messages in display 366 Sensor cover 346 Warning and indicator lamps 225 Warning sounds 225 Door Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) 123 Entry lamps 153 Inside door handle 122 Inside door handle, Front 29 Inside door handle, Rear (Maybach 57) 54 Inside door handle, Rear (Maybach 62) 55 Locking, SmartKey 80 Locking, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 80 Message in display 388 Opening from inside 122 Power closing assist for doors 128 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 288 Unlocking the driver’s door, Mechanical key 401 Unlocking, SmartKey 58 450 Door control panel In the rear Maybach 57 54 Maybach 62 55 Door handle Lock button (KEYLESS-GO**) 80 DOT 333 Drink holder see Cup holder Drinking and driving 297 Driving 68 Abroad 303 Hydroplaning 300 In winter 301 Instructions 297 Problems 76 Safety systems 103 Systems 221 Through standing water With Distronic** 231 Driving safety systems ABS 103 BAS 104 Electro-hydraulic brake system 107 ESP® 105 Driving systems Airmatic DC 233 Cruise control 221 Distronic** 223 Parktronic 237 Vehicle level control 234 Driving tips 181 Accelerator position 181 Kickdown 181 DVD player Compartment for 39, 41, 45, 255, 256 Storage compartment for 43 E Easy-entry/exit feature 65, 177 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical outlets see Power outlets Electrical system, Technical data 438 Electro-hydraulic brake system Messages in display 378, 379, 381 Self-check 108 Warning lamp 107 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® Electrotransparent roof lighting* 152 Electrotransparent roof* 218 Cleaning 350 Lowering panel 350 Making opaque/transparent 219, 220 Opening/closing screen 219, 220 Operating from the cockpit 218 Operating from the rear 219 Operating the screen 28, 218 Emergency calls Tele Aid calls 283 Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) 185 Index Emergency operations Locking/unlocking the vehicle 401 Power tilt/sliding sunroof, Manual operation 403 Remote door unlock 288 Trunk, Releasing from inside 127 Trunk, unlocking 402 Emergency, In case of Battery, Jump starting 421 First aid kit 400 Flat tire, Changing 413 Fuses 426 Hazard warning flasher 147 Instrument cluster, Indicator lamps 354 Roadside Assistance 12 Roadside Assistance (Tele Aid) 285 Towing the vehicle 423 Emission control 304 Emission control information label 433 Emission control system warranties 10 Engine Belt layout 434 Cleaning 344 Compartment 307 Malfunction indicator lamp 23, 361 Number 435 Oils 441 Starting with KEYLESS-GO** 60 Starting with SmartKey 60 Tachometer 23 Technical data 435 Turning off with KEYLESS-GO** 79 Turning off with SmartKey 78 Engine coolant see Coolant Engine oil 309, 441 Adding 310 Additives 441 Changing 441 Checking level 309 Consumption 309 Display messages 388 Filler neck 310 Messages in display 309, 388 Recommended engine oils and oil filters 441 Engine oil level see Oil level ESP® 105 Messages in display 354 Warning lamp 23, 105, 354 ETD 95 Safety guidelines 85 Exterior rear view mirrors 67, 186, 188 Parking position 141, 187 External communication (special order equipment) 276 F Filler neck, Engine oil 310 First aid kit 400 Flat tire 324, 413 Jacking up the vehicle 414 Lowering the vehicle 416 Mounting the spare wheel 413 Preparing the vehicle 413 Flexible Service System see FSS Fluids Automatic transmission fluid 310 Brake fluid 441 Capacities 440 Engine coolant 310, 440 Engine oil 309, 440, 441 Power steering fluid 440 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 441, 446 Fog lamps 145, 407 Messages in display 391 Replacing bulbs 407 Folding table* 39, 43, 263 Front airbags 86 Front lamps see headlamps Front passenger front airbag 86 Front seat head restraints see Head restraints FSS (Canada vehicles) 339 451 Index Fuel 306 Additives 443 Capacity, Fuel tank 440 Filling the tank 305 Fuel filler flap and cap 305 Fuel reserve warning lamp 23, 355 Premium unleaded gasoline 306 Requirements, Octane rating 442 Fuel filler flap 305 Locking 305 Unlocking 305 Fuel reserve warning lamp 23, 355 Fuel tank Capacity 440 Filler flap 305 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities 440 Fuse box 428 Fuses 426 Aids for replacing fuses 426 Fuse box in engine compartment 427 Fuse box in passenger compartment 427 Fuse box in trunk 428 Fuse chart 400 Fuse extractor 400 Replacing 426 Spare fuses 400 G Garage door opener 28, 289 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 334 452 Gear range Automatic transmission 182 Limiting 182 Shifting into optimal 184 Gear selector lever 70, 178 Cleaning 348 Gearshift pattern 178 Lock 70 Message in display 373 Position 179, 180 Position indicator 180 Shifting procedure 179 Glove box 201, 249 Good visibility 186 GPS 282 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 334 GVWR 334 H Hands-free microphone 28 Hard plastic trim items, Cleaning 348 Hazard warning flasher 147 Head restraints Adjusting 132, 133 Front seat 64 Rear seats 131 Headlamp cleaning system 21, 186, 306, 311 Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed switch-off, Exterior lamps Headlamps 143 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps 142 Automatic headlamp mode 143 Bi-Xenon 142, 407 Cleaning lenses 345 Cleaning system 186, 311, 446 High beam see High beam flasher High beam see High beam headlamps Messages in display 390, 391, 392, 393, 394 Replacing bulbs 408 Switch 73 Headliner and shelf below rear window, Cleaning and care of 349 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* 152 Lighting 48, 49 Headphone jacks 39, 41, 43, 45, 255, 256 Headphones Storage compartments In rear doors 251 Heated seats 138 Heated steering wheel 276 Lever 21 Height adjustments Vehicle level 234 High beam flasher 145, 146 High beam headlamps Indicator lamp 23 Messages in display 391 Switching 74 Switching on 146 Index High mounted brake lamp 407 Hood 307 Message in display 388 Opening 307 Horn 21 HVAC see Automatic climate control Hydroplaning 300 I Identification labels 432 Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 432, 433 Ignition 60, 71 Immobilizer 110 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Infrared reflecting windshield 293 Inside door handle 122 Instrument cluster 22, 154 Cleaning 348 Illumination brightness 154 Lamps 354 Messages in display see Multifunction display Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Interior lighting Delayed switch-off 175 Front 148 Rear 149 Interior rear view mirror 67 Auto-dimming 186 Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments J Jack 400, 415 Jacking up the vehicle 414 Jump starting 421 K Key, Mechanical 401 Key, SmartKey 58, 114 Battery check lamp 114, 121 Checking batteries 121 Factory setting 115 Global locking 116 Global unlocking 115, 116 Locking/unlocking 58, 80, 114 Loss of 121 Messages in display 390 Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof 211 Opening and closing the power windows 211 Opening the trunk 124 Positions in starter switch 60 Remote control 114 Replacing the batteries 405 Restoring to factory setting 116 Selective setting 116 Starting the engine 71 Turning off the engine 78 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 117 Battery check lamp 117 Checking batteries 121 Factory setting 120 Global locking 120 Global unlocking 120 Locking/unlocking 59, 80, 117 Loss of 121 Messages in display 389 Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof 211 Opening and closing the power windows 211 Opening the trunk 124 Remote control 117 Replacing the batteries 405 Restoring to factory setting 121 Selective setting 120 Starting the engine 60 Turning off the engine 79 Kickdown 181 Kilopascal 334 453 Index L Labels 432, 433 Certification 432 Emission control information 433 Vacuum line routing diagram label 433 Lamp sensor Message in display 390 Lamps, exterior Message in display 390 Rear 407 Lamps, indicator and warning ABS 23, 356 Anti-theft alarm systems 110 454 Battery (SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**) 121 Battery (SmartKey) 121 Brakes 23, 360 CHECK ENGINE 361 Coolant 383 Distronic** 23, 225, 356 Electro-hydraulic brake system 107 Engine diagnostics 361 Engine malfunction 23, 361 ESP® 23, 105, 354 Fuel reserve 355 High beam headlamp 23 Instrument cluster 354–355 Parktronic 238 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 25, 362 Restraint system 23 Seat belt telltale 23 Seat belts 357, 358 SRS 83 Tire inflation pressure 23, 359, 396 Tow away alarm 110 Turn signals 23 Language, Setting 172 LATCH-type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle Leather upholstery, Cleaning and care of 349 Level control Airmatic DC 236 Level control system Airmatic DC 233 License plate lamp Messages in display 393 Replacing bulbs 407, 410 Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 348 Light sensor 390 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting, Exterior and interior 142 Limp-Home Mode 185 Loading see Vehicle loading Locator lighting 145 Lock button Door handle 80 SmartKey 114 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 117 Trunk 121 Locking knob 122 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 431 SmartKey 121 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 121 Low beam headlamps 142 Messages in display 391 Replacing bulbs 407 Switching on 73 Lowering Vehicle 416 Lubricants 440 Index M Maintenance 11, 339 Calling up service indicator display 340 Clearing service indicator message 340 FSS (Canada vehicles) 339 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 339 Resetting service indicator 341 Service indicator 339 Service term exceeded 340 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 339 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Massage function (PULSE, Multicontour seats) 137 Maximum load rating, Tires 334 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 334 Maximum tire inflation pressure 334 Maybach battery charger* 267 Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pocket 37, 254 Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pocket 254 Mechanical key 401 Loss of 121 Memory function 140 Menus see Control system menus Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Microphone External communication 276 Hands-free 28 Mirrors 66 Adjusting 66 Auto-dimming 186 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 187 Exterior rear view mirrors 67 Interior rear view mirror 67 Mobile phone see Telephone MON 306 MP3-CD operation Selecting tracks 164 Multicontour seats 137 Multifunction display 23, 24, 157, 158, 162 Selecting language 172 Standard display 161, 162 Multifunction display messages 365 ABS 365 Air filter 366 Airmatic DC 376 Battery 366, 377 Brake fluid 381 Brake lamps 393 Brake pads 382 Check engine 361 Coolant 384 Coolant level 383 Cruise control 386 Distronic** 366 Doors 388 Electro-hydraulic brake system 378, 379, 381 Engine oil 309, 387, 388 Engine oil level 388 ESP® 368 Fog lamps 391, 393 Fuel cap 395 Gear selector lever 373 Headlamps 390, 391, 392, 393, 394 Hood 388 Parking brake 377 SmartKey 390 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 389 Steering oil 395 Tele Aid 373 Tires 375, 396–399 Trunk 388 Washer fluid 395 455 Index Multifunction steering wheel 21, 24, 158 Button operation 158 N Navigation system Operating 166 See separate COMAND operating instructions Navigation system DVD drive 256 Neutral gear position 70 Neutral gear position, Automatic transmission 178, 180 New vehicle break-in 296 Night security illumination 145, 174 Non-smokers equipment* 263 Normal occupant weight 334 Number, vehicle identification (VIN) 432, 433 O Occupant distribution 334 Occupant safety 82 Airbags 83 Children and airbags 84 Children in the vehicle 95 Fastening the seat belts 68 Infant and child restraint systems 98 LATCH-type child seat anchors 99 Seat belts 68, 92 Odometer 23, 157 Oil see Engine oil 456 One-touch gearshifting Automatic transmission 184 Gear selector lever 184 Operating safety 15 Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 345 Outside microphone 276 Outside temperature indicator 23, 31, 33, 35, 37, 155 Overdue maintenance service 340 Overhead control panel 28 P Paintwork, Cleaning 343 Panic alarm 102 Panic button 102 Parking 77, 299 Parking Assist System (PAS) 240 Camera 241, 347 Cleaning of the camera lens 347 Parallel parking 244 Parallel parking button 26, 27 Reverse parking (back-in parking) 243 Switching on 242 Parking brake 77 Message in display 377 Parking lamps Messages in display 392, 394 Replacing bulbs 407, 409 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 141, 187 Gear position 70 Parktronic 237 Activating/deactivating 240 Cleaning system sensors 346 Malfunctioning 240 Minimum distance 238 Range of the sensors 238 Sensors 238 Warning indicator 21, 39, 41, 43, 45, 238, 239 Warning sound 240 Partition* 271 Opening/Closing 273 Parts service 430 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Indicator lamp 25, 362 Passenger compartment 302 Fuse box 427 Interior rear view mirror 67 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Passenger seat Adjusting from the rear 54 Pedals 297 Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 348 Poly-V-belt drive 434 Layout 434 Power assistance 297 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid 128 Power folding exterior rear view mirrors 188 Power outlets 266 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 212 Index Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) Opening/closing 212 Opening/closing in an emergency 403 Stopping 213 Synchronizing 213 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Opening/closing 214, 215 Opening/closing in an emergency 404 Operating from cockpit 215 Operating from the rear passenger compartment 216 Stopping 215, 217 Synchronizing 217 Power washer 343 Power windows 209 Cleaning 347 Operating 209 Rear door window, Blocking operation 100 Synchronizing 210 Practical hints 354 Premium unleaded gasoline 442 Problems While driving 76 With vehicle 16 Product information 9 Production options weight 334 Program mode see Automatic transmission, Automatic shift program Program mode selector switch Automatic shift program 183 PSI 334 PULSE function (Massage function) 137 Push-start see Tow-start R Radial-ply tires Summer tires 437 Radio Selecting stations 163 Selecting stations, Satellite radio (USA only) 163 Station selection setting, Control system 176 Radio transmitters 303 Range (distance to empty) 168 Reading lamps Front 148 Rear 149 Rear bench seat Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 40 Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 44 Rear center console 46 Maybach 57 46, 47 Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 51, 52 Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof 48, 49 Rear door windows Blocking operation 100 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear passenger compartment Control panel Maybach 57 30, 32 Maybach 62 34 Maybach 62 with partition* 36 Maybach 62 without partition* 34 Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints Rear seats 131 Adjusting Head restraint tilt 131 Adjustment 131 Extending and retracting rear seat head restraints 134 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window curtain 267 Rear window defroster 190 Recommended tire inflation pressure 334 Recovery services, Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 288 Refrigerant, Air conditioning 441 Refrigerator** 265 Cleaning 343 Controlling temperature 265 Opening 265 Rear center armrest 255 Switching on/off 265 Refueling 305 Regular checks 306 Remote control SmartKey 114 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 117 457 Index Remote door unlock 288 Remote rear door closing 123 Remote trunk opening/closing switch 124, 125 Replacing bulbs 406 Additional turn signals 408 Backup bulbs 408 Brake lamp 408 Cornering lamp 409 Fog lamps 408 Front turn signal bulb 410 High beam flasher bulb 409 High mounted brake lamp 408 License plate lamp 410 Parking lamps 409 Side marker bulb 410 Standing lamps 409 Turn signal lamps 407 Reporting safety defects 17 Reset button, In instrument cluster 154, 170 Residual engine heat and ventilation 200 Restraint system See Children in the vehicle Reverse gear position 70, 73 Reverse gear position, Automatic transmission 178, 180 Rims 334, 437 Rims (light alloy) 437 Roadside Assistance 12, 285 RON 306 Rubber parts, Cleaning 348 458 S Safety Driving safety systems 103 Occupant 82 Reporting defects 17 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio (USA only) 163 Seat belts 92 Children in the vehicle 95 Cleaning 349 Fastening 68 Force limiter 95 Proper use of 69, 93 Safety guidelines 85 Telltale 23, 357, 358 Warning sounds 92 Seating capacity 316 Seats 62 Adjustment 63 Adjustment, Rear seat (Maybach 57) 132 Adjustment, Rear seat (Maybach 62) 133 Heating 138 Memory function 141 Multicontour 136 Setting from rear 135 Ventilation* 139 Securing cargo 247 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Self-test Tele Aid 282 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance, Service indicator Service life, Tires 314 Service see Maintenance Service system see FSS (Canada vehicles) or Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Service, Parts 430 Settings Control system menus 161 Control system submenus 161 Factory, SmartKey 115 Factory, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 120 Individual, SmartKey 116 Individual, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 120 Individual, Vehicle 170 Resetting all, Control system 170 Selective, SmartKey 116 Selective, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 120 Shelf below rear window, Cleaning and care of 349 Shift program mode, Automatic transmission 183 Shifting, Automatic transmission 178 Side impact airbags 87 Side marker lamps 407 Cleaning lenses 345 Messages in display 392 Replacing bulbs 407, 410 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 334 Index SmartKey see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** see Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Snow chains 338 Snow tires 338 Solar panel* 208 Spare fuses 400 Spare wheel 437 Mounting 413 Speed settings Cruise control 222 Distronic** 228 Speedometer 23, 225 In the rear 31, 33, 35, 37 SRS 82 Indicator lamp 23, 359 Message in display 373 Standing lamps Replacing bulbs 407 Standing water, Driving through 302 Starter battery 417 Starter switch 21 Positions 60 Starting difficulties, Engine 71 Starting, Engine 70 Steering column 65 Steering gear oil Message in display 395 Steering wheel 64 Adjusting 64 Buttons 158 Cleaning 348 Heated 276 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 288 Stopping Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 213 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 215 Windows 210 Storage compartment/drawer Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 252 Storage compartments 248 Armrest, Front 263 Between rear seats 255 For wireless surround sound headphones 251 Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 252 Compartment for the front telephone 250 For CD changer 255, 256 For DVD player 255, 256 Front doors 250 Glove box 249 Rear center armrest 263 Rear center console 252 Rear doors, Maybach 57 251 Rear doors, Maybach 62 251 Refrigerator** 255 Telephone 250, 255 Under the driver’s seat 251 With navigation system DVD drive 256 Storage pocket Maybach 62 with partition* 37, 254 Maybach 62 without partition* 254 Storing tires 315 Submenus see Control system submenus Summer opening feature 211 Sun visors 189 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Symbols used in this operator’s manual 14 T Tachometer 23, 155 Overspeed range 155 Tail lamps Cleaning lenses 345 Messages in display 394 Replacing bulbs 407 Tar stains 343 459 Index Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 441 Brake fluid 441 Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 440 Coolant 440, 443 Electrical system 438 Engine 435 Engine oil additives 441 Engine oils 440, 441 Fuel requirements 440, 442 Gasoline additives 443 Main dimensions and weights 439 Premium unleaded gasoline 440, 442 Rims and tires 436 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 441 Windshield washer system 446 Tele Aid 281 Call priority 287 Emergency calls 283 Hands-free microphone 28 Information 287 Initiating an emergency call manually 284 Messages in display 373 Remote door unlock 288 Roadside Assistance 285 SOS button 284 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 288 System self-check 282 460 Telephone 277 Answering/ending a call 166 Compartment in the front 250, 278 Compartment in the rear 255, 256, 280 Hands-free microphone 28 In the front 278 In the rear 280 Operation 277 Phone book 165 Redialing 166 Telephone cradle Changing 279 Temperature Interior temperature 207 Outside indicator 155 Tether attachment points see Children in the vehicle Tie-down hooks, Trunk 247 Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 416 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof TIN 335 Tire and Loading Information Placard 315 Tire and loading terminology 333 Tires 313 Care and maintenance 313 Chains 338 Checking tire inflation pressure 321 Cleaning 315 Direction of rotation 315 Driving instructions 300 Important notes, Tire inflation pressure 320 Inflation pressure 321 Inspection 314 Load rating 335 Messages in display 375, 396–399 Index Ply composition and material used 335 Problems under-/overinflation 325 Retreads 313 Rims and tires 436 Rotating 336 Service life 314 Sizes 436 Snow 337 Spare wheel 400, 413 Speed rating 301, 328, 335, 337 Storing 315 Temperature 320, 332 Terminology 333 Tire Identification Number see TIN Traction 300 Tread 335 Tread depth 314, 338 Treadwear indicators 335 Vehicle maximum load on 335 Wear pattern 336 Winter 338 Tools 400 Top tether Children in the vehicle 98 Tow-away alarm 111 Towing eye bolt 400 Towing the vehicle 423 Tow-start 423 Traction 183, 335 Transmission see Automatic transmission Traveling abroad 303 Tread 335 Tread depth 314 Treadwear indicators 335 Trip computer 167 Trip odometer 155 Trunk Closing 125 Emergency release 127 Fuse box 428 Lighting 153 Message in display 388 Opening 123, 124 Power closing assist for trunk lid Tie-down hooks 247 Valet locking 127 Trunk lid see Trunk Tumbler holder see Cup holder Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 345 Messages in display 393 Replacing bulbs 410 Turning off engine 78 Two-way intercom* 274 Adjusting volume 275 Operating 274 Switching on/off 274 U Umbrella 257 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 335 Units, Settings Speedometer 172 Unleaded gasoline, Premium 306, 440, 442 Upholstery, Cleaning and care of 349 Useful features 248 128 V Vacuum line routing diagram label 433 Valet locking 127 Vanity mirror In the rear 248 In the sun visor 248 Opening/closing 248 Vehicle Batteries 417 Breaking-in the vehicle 296 Care 342 Control system, Settings menu 170 Dimensions 439 Locking/unlocking 58, 79, 114 Locking/unlocking in an emergency 401, 402 Lowering 416 Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 15 Towing 423 Washing 344 Weights 439 Vehicle jack 400, 415 Vehicle level Setting Automatic 236 Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC Vehicle lighting 142, 306 461 Index Vehicle loading 247 Cargo tie-down hooks 247 Instructions 247 Load limit 316 Terminology 315, 333 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 335 Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen (Tele Aid) 288 Vehicle status message memory 169 Vehicle tool kit 400 Vehicle washing 344 Voice control system Hands-free microphone 28 Lever 21 W Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function** 230 Distronic** 225 Exterior lamps 143 Parking brake 73, 360 Parktronic 240 Seat belt telltale 92 Switching off headlamps 80 Warranty coverage 10, 431 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing the vehicle 342 Wear pattern, Tires 336 Weights, Vehicle 439 462 Wheel Bolts 416 Change 413 Removing 415 Sizes 326, 437 Spare 400, 413 Tightening torque 416 Tires and wheels 313 Window curtain airbags 87 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 75 Cleaning wiper blades 347 Defogging 195 Windshield washer fluid 311 Message in display 395 Mixing ratio 446 Refilling 311, 446 Wiping 75 Windshield wipers 21, 74 Cleaning wiper blades 347 Replacing wiper blades 411 Winter driving 337 Snow chains 338 Tires 338 Winter driving instructions 301 Winter tires 338 Wood trims, Cleaning 350